Home
        User Manual, M-Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive
         Contents
1.                                                                                       Terminal Signal Factory setting Description  1  10V Output nominal voltage     Maximum load 10 mA  reference potential GND  2      Analog signal input 1 Frequency reference value 0   10V       gt 200k ohms   0 4 20 mA         200 ohms   Selectable through microswitch S2  GND Reference potential     OV  4 Al2 Analog input 2 PID controller  actual value    0   10V       gt 200k ohms   0 4   20 mA  Rp   200 ohms   Selectable through microswitch S3  5 GND Reference potential     OV  6 24V Control voltage for 011   016  output         Maximum load 50 mA  reference potential GND    24V   7 DI C Reference potential of the digital LOGIC   GND  Selectable through microswitch LOGIC        inputs DI1   DI6  8      Digital input 1 FWD start enable  forward    0   30V       gt 12k ohms   9 012 Digital input 2 REV start enable  reverse    0 30         gt 12k ohms   10 DI3 Digital input 3 Fixed frequency BO    0   30         gt 12   ohms   13 00  Digital output Active   READY    Transistor  max  50 mA  supply voltage control  signal terminal 20  14 04 Digital input 4 Fixed frequency B1    0 30    Rj   12k ohms   15 015 Digital input 5 Error acknowledgment    0 30          12k ohms   16 DI6 Digital input 6 Pl controller deactivated    0 30    Rj   12k ohms   18   0 Analog output Output frequency    0 10    max  10 mA  20 00  Digital output Supply voltage  see control signal Supply voltage for digital output
2.                                                  Item  Number    1    Description  Supply L1  L2 N  L3  PE  mains supply voltage Uj jy   Ug at 50 60 Hz     MMX11  100          12  200  MMX32  200  MMX34  400    MMX35  575V class  three phase input conn    V class  single phase mains connection  1 AC 120V    V class  single phase mains connection  1 AC 230V 240V    V class  three phase mains connection  3 AC 230V 240V    V class  three phase mains connection  3 AC 400V 480V      ection  3 AC 575V        nternal RFI fil  EMC connecti    er  MMX   F     category C2 an  on of internal RFI filter with PE     d C3  in accordance with IEC EN 61800 3       Rectifier bridge  single phase  MMX1    or thr       ee phase              converts the AC voltage of the electrical network into DC voltage          DC choke  DC    ink choke  only for MMX32   F and MMX34   F in frame sizes FS4 and FS5           DC link with charging resistor  capacitor and switching mode power supply unit   SMPS   Switching Mode Power Supply   DC link voltage Upc  Upc   1 41 x ULN       Braking transistor  connections DC  R  and R  for external braking resistor  only for MMX32 and MMX34 from frame size FS2           nverter  The IGBT based inverter converts th  frequency  12   Sinusoidal pulse width                 e DC voltage of the DC link  Upc  into a three phase AC voltage  02  with variable amplitude and  ation            with V f control can be switched to speed control with slip compensation          Moto
3.                                                 Device Series MMX11  MMX11AA   N0 0 Symbols 0  Unit 1D7 204 208 307 408  Rated operational current le A 1 7 24 2 8 3 7 4 8  Overload current for 60s every 600s at 122  F  50            2 6 3 6 42 5 6 72  Starting current for 2s every 20s at 122  F  50  C        3 4 48 5 6 74 9 6  Apparent power at rated operation 9 230V 5        0 68 0 36 1 12 1 47 1 91  240V 5        0 71 0 89 116 1 54 1 99  Assigned motor rating  230V  2 P kW 0 25 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1  HP 1 4 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 2   Power side  primary side    Number of phases Single phase or two phase   Rated voltage UIN V 110 15  120  109  50 60 Hz    94   132V  0   45 66 Hz  0     Input current ILN A 9 2 11 6 12 4 15 16 5  Maximum leakage current to ground  PE  without motor   MMX11   N_ IpE mA  Braking torque   Default M MN    30   DC braking 1 6    100  adjustable  Pulse frequency fPWM kHz 6  adjustable 1   16   Heat dissipation at rated operational current  le  Py      22 3 27 9 33 4 40 3 49 2  Efficiency h 0 91 0 92 0 94 0 95 0 96  Fan  device internal  temperature controlled                         Installation size FS2 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS3  Weight m Lbs  kg  1 5 07  15 07   1 5 0   1 5 07  2 2  0 99   Notes       Symbols used in technical data and formulas      Internal voltage doubler circuit    ULN   115V     gt  Up   230V   ULN   120V     gt  Up   240V     Guide value  calculated   no standard rating     142 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www
4.                              Description Symbols    Unit Specification  Power Section  Rated operational voltage      Hz at 50 60  MMX11 Ue Vac 1 115  110    1596 to 120 41096   MMX12 Ue Vac 1 230  208  15  to 240 41096   MMX32 Ue Vac 3 230  208    15  to 240 1096   MMX34 Ue Vac 3 400  380    15  to 480 41096   MMX35 Ue Vac 3 575   15  to 41096   Input switch on frequency         Maximum one time per minute  Input current THD 90 2120  Short circuit current Ik kA Maximum   50  Input frequency      Hz 50 60  45 66 Hz 4096   Pulse frequency   PWM kHz 1   16  default   6 kHz        switching frequency of the inverter   Operating mode         V f characteristic curve control  FS   speed control with slip  compensation  Output voltage U2 V    AC 230  MMX11   3 AC Ug        12  MMX32        34  MMX35   Output frequency fo Hz 0 320  Frequency resolution  setpoint value  Hz 0 01  Rated operational current        100  continuous current at maximum 122  F  50  C  ambient temperature  Overload current        150 for 60s every 600   Starting current        200 for 2s every 20s  Braking torque Mpg MN   5530 for all sizes  Up to maximum 100  My only as of size MMX34   4D3 with external  braking resistance  Control Section  Control voltage  output  Uc Vdc 24  max  50 mA  Reference voltage  output  Us Vdc 10  max  10 mA  Input  digital  parameter definable         6x  max   30         Rj  gt 12k ohms  Permitted residual ripple with external       Max  5  AU  U   control voltage   24V   Input 
5.                           5 2   17           fl       P5 3   18                     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 105    Parameters    Example      Comparable example A    P10 10  0   P10 9   2  Execute program cycle once in steps     Each fixed frequency  P10 1   P10 10  is called individually in the program sequence  After the  assigned run times    10 11   10 18  have elapsed  the output frequency is set to zero  according to the Stop function  P6 8  before the next numerically fixed frequency value is  executed     A clockwise rotating field  REV  can also be assigned here to the individual fixed frequencies  as a decimal program number at parameter P10 10  see Page 102      Example C  Program Cycle Executed Once in Steps  P10 9   2  P10 10   0          10 4                                           103      4                                   10 2                     10 1                                                                         P3 21           22521  P5 1   16           5 2   17                              5 3   18                106 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    V Hz Characteristic Curve  P11     The M Max series frequency inverters operate with a  sinusoidal pulse width modulation            in the inverter  The  IGBTs are actuated by two V f based control procedures that  you can select in parameter P11 8     P11 8   0     e Frequency control  Hz   
6.                          List of Fault Messages      and Warning Messages  AL                            Error Messages via Operating Unit                                           Control Unit  Elements  23 5 asa Pee e DOR RD SU      ah ALS ee    TERR  Areas of the LCD Display   sam nban nde        t tbe        anda te det                 Setting Parameters    x   ax us qme nus Red      ag ER SERRE MU EUR EOS ge  Predefined Application Parameters from Parameter   1 2                           Default I O        Parameter Selections  teier aei ain cee e oed bt              Analog Inputs    Digital Inputs    Analog Outputs  Digital Outputs  Drives Control    Protective EUhetlons  xcd      ve DR Toten ence EE Ne ee oe dada    PID Controller    Fixed Erequency s ness aba eek he AOL Ra es    RIA Ns esq AS  Fixed Frequency Setpoint Value                                              Determining the Program Number  P10 10                                     Fixed  Frequency Setpoint Value         nx ren ere SR bs          Gant aes  ViEz Gharacteristc               2 54 4 orm ER                                 vesc ug    Braking        Logic Function    Second  Pararfieter Seb                                         d          Whe          ed te  Systemi Parameters      ds      d der  A eh                   ata eS  Operational Data Indicator                                                    Status Displays    ExampleS  23 4 detener apre s tbe bebe he de tug              Setpoint Inp
7.                    Default I O   Designation     Terminal Function Parameter Designation     Terminal Function Parameter  DI1 8 Start Fwd P3 1  P3 2 016 16 PID Controller Deactivate P3 12   DI2 9 Stop Start Rev P3 1  P3 3 R01  NO  22 23 Run P5 1  P5 10  DI3 10 Fixed Frequency       12 Hz  P3 9  P10 2 R02  NO NC  24 25 26 Fault P5 2  P5 11  014 14 Fixed Frequency B1  18 Hz  P3 10  P10 3 DO 13 Ready P5 3  P5 9  DI5 15 Fault Reset P3 7   Parameter Selection  P1    n the parameter selection  P1   you can choose between the A return to a previous parameter is not possible here  The    factory set quick configuration  P1 1   1  with a reduced  parameter set and all parameters  P1 1   0      The setting of the parameters with the quick configuration   P1 1 2 1  is guided by a Quickstart Wizard   A listing of  parameters is on Page 66   Each executed parameter must  be processed in succession up to frequency display M1 1        Parameter Selections    preset application parameters are selected under P1 2    Only when the quick start assistant  M1 1  is completed can  the parameters be called again and then also individually   With P1 1   0  all parameters  and P1 2   0  1  2  or 3  you  can link the predefined application values with all  parameters    Every single parameter value is reset to factory settings  every time that the application menu is activated                                      Access Value  Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Range Description  P1 3   P1 1 115         Quic
8.                   US American  Designation US American Value SI Value Conversion Value Designation  Length        25 4 mm 0 0394 inch  Power 1 hp   1 014 PS 0 7457 kW 1 341 horsepower  Torque 1 Ibf in 0 113 Nm 8 851 pound force inches  Temperature 1  F  Tp     17 222      Tc  Tp   Te x 9 5   32 Fahrenheit  Speed 1 RPM 1            1 revolutions per minute  Weight 1 Ib 0 4536 kg 2 205 pound       2 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    M Max Series Overview    This manual provides a description of the M Max series  frequency inverters  It provides special information required  for project planning  installation  and for the operation of the  MMX frequency inverter  All information applies to the  specified hardware and software versions     Please read the manual thoroughly before you install and  operate the frequency inverter     Notes on the Second MMX Upgrade   This second edition of the manual describes the  extended functionality of the MMX  This applies to  M Max series frequency inverters from production date  12W10 zS N 91275113  see nameplate     Essential features of this upgrade       New control circuit board with a more powerful  microprocessor    e Side mounted interface for fieldbus connections  1     Two additional control buttons  2     e Extended functionality for digital and analog inputs and  outputs  3     M Max Frequency Converter                            M Max Series Overview    We assume that you have a g
9.                O OG  MMX32AA011     0 2 4 24   10 8 0 31 0 5 0 6 037   044 0 6x3 5 Li 12 1   uri V T2 W T3   o O O        MMX34AA7D6_ 0 2   4 24   10 8 0 31 0 5 0 6 037   044 0 6x3 5 Li L2 N      R  R  U TI V T2           MMX34AA9D0_  MMX34AA012_ elo o o ole  MMX34AA014  FS4         2    017 05   16 20 6 8 0 39 1 2 1 5 0 88 1 11 0 6x3 5 L  L2 L3 DC  R  R  DC         V T2 W T3  MMX32AA025_                MMX34AA016 05   16 20 6 8 0 39 12 1 5 0 88 1 11 06  35 LI L2 L3 DC  R  R  DC         V T2 W T3  MMX34AA023_  OO          FS5 MMX32AA031_ 05 16 20 6 8 0 39 1 2 1 5 0 88 111 0 6  3 5    2 13  DC  R  R  DC         V T2 W T3          2    038 HHH HHH   00          MMX34AA031 05 16 20 6 8 0 39 1 2 1 5 0 88 1 11 0 6x3 5 u B DC  R  R  DC         V T2 W T3  MMX34AA038_  OUO    C X  M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 37    Installation    Connection on Control Section    The control signal terminals are arranged under the front Example for a Single Side Connection  PES  to the  cover flap  Frequency Inverter    Position of Control Signal Terminals                   Prevent any unraveling on the other end of the control line  with a rubber grommet  The shielding braid is not to make  any connection with protective ground here because this  would cause problems with an interference loop        Example for an Insulated End of the Control Cable        10V AI1GND 24V DI1 DI2    The cable hold down clamps contained in the scope of  delivery can b
10.                Start Stop Command with Maximum Setpoint Value  Voltage  Acceleration Ramp 35                                            Brief Instructions  Steps to the Motor Start                                    Example of an Error Message  Undervoltage                                    Example of an Alarm Message    oen eere petu ex qa ae dwg ace dae e    View of the Keypad with LCD Display  Function Keys  and Interface  LCD   Liquid Crystal Display                                   LED Display  Areas     re br ER        I qe EUER CIE ea oe m  Operational Data Indicator  Operational                                        Parameter Menu  P1 1   1  Quick Configuration                                 Schematic Representation of Parameter Access                                Analog Inp  ts ATT and    i 2 2             Atte eme vu EU ET NECI En  Example of Scaled Analog Input Signals                                       Example of Scaled Analog Input Signals with Offset                             ter Time  Constant           eoo c add                    wee Wee aes Nec               igital Inputs for Source and Sink Type                                         ontrol Logic Reaction to a Rising or Falling Edge    Source           SINK TYPE    seg o                     ov hea      NEAN Cuir qui               4  2125          Leite act ee dee iret Maw cae wea ree oue  Example  Start Stop Impulse  rari 2r tt bei gue eo ue hes PER ADS  Analog Output AO                         
11.            Notes        P6 24  P6 26  P6 28        P6 25  P6 27  P6 29   In systems with mechanical resonances  you can cut out these frequency ranges for stationary operation   Up to three different frequency ranges can be set     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 87    Parameters    Motor  P7     For optimal operation  enter the ratings plate information  for the motor here  This information makes up the base  values for the motor controller  electrical reproduction   see  V Hz Characteristic Curve  P11   on Page 107      Motor Parameters from Ratings Plate          P7 5 P7 1     1                                           230 400V 4 0 2 3A  0 75 kW             0 67                      1410 min 1 50Hz                                                                         The motor data is set to the rated operation data for the  frequency inverter and depends on the performance  variables in factory settings     Switching Type for Motor Stator Windings    When selecting the rating data  take the dependency of the  type of switching on the strength of the feeding input voltage  into account     e 230V  P7 5      delta circuit A     P7 1   4A   e 400V  P7 5      star connection     P7 1   2 3A     Circuits  Delta  Star              U1  V1       U1  V1         Ly   SUE  Wal Go  V2 W2  U2  V2  U y   230V U y   400V    Example  Single phase connection of the MMX12AA4D8_  frequency inverter to a input voltage of 230V  The  stator w
12.            gt  Pl Ist A  18 2  0  4  20 mA      f Out AO S  0 10V   10 mA        2  2  i  Ready  _   DO            9   50 mA    poem ren E  DO      eo      gt  4  Notes       External brake resistor terminals R  and R  are only available on three phase FS2 and FS3 drives      EMC filter only available on MMX34    units     48 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Insulation Testing    The M Max series frequency inverters are tested  delivered  and require no additional testing        WARNING    On the control signal and the connection terminals of the  frequency inverter  no leakage resistance tests are to be  performed with an insulation tester     A WARNING    Wait at least 5 minutes after switching the supply  voltage off before you disconnect a connection on the  connection terminals  L1  L2 N  L3  U T1  V T2  W T3   R   R   of the frequency inverter     If insulation testing is required in the power circuit of the  PDS  you must consider the following measures     Testing the Motor Cable Insulation   Disconnect the motor cable from connection terminals U T1   V T2 and W T3 of the frequency inverter and from the motor   U  V  W   Measure the insulation resistance of the motor  cable between the individual phase conductors and between  the phase conductor and the protective conductor     The insulation resistance must be greater than 1M ohm     Installation    Testing the Input Cable Insulation   Disconnect the power cable from
13.           Item Item  Number Description Number Description  1 Mounting holes  screw fastening  1 Fixing holes  screw fastening   2 Release  removal from mounting rail  2 Device fans  3 Recess for mounting on mounting rail  DIN EN 50022 35  3 Fixing holes for flange mounting  4 Interface for fieldbus connection modules  option   MMX FLANGE    FS_ option required    MMX NET XA  4 EMC mounting accessories  5 EMC installation accessories 5 Cover flap for connecting the fieldbus interface cards  6 Power section terminals 6 Power section terminals  7 Cover flap of control signal terminals and microswitches 7 Screws for opening the housing cover  8 Interface for PC connection module MMX COM PC  option  8 Cover flap of control signal terminals and microswitches  9 Keypad with 9 control buttons 9 Interface for PC connection module MMX COM PC  option   10 Display unit  LCD  10 Keypad with 9 control buttons   11 Display unit  LCD    Features    The M Max frequency inverter converts the voltage and frequency of an existing AC network  into DC voltage  This DC voltage is used to generate a three phase AC voltage with adjustable  frequency and assigned amplitude values for the variable speed control of three phase   asynchronous motors     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 13    M Max Series Overview    Block Diagram  Elements of M Max Frequency Inverters                                                                                          
14.          P10 9   1  P10 10   0                  104  Example B  Program Cycle Executed           P10 9   1  P10 10   192                105  Example C  Program Cycle Executed Once in Steps  P10 9   2  P10 10   0           106  V Hz Characteristic Curve  P11 1                                        4   108  Speed Behavior without Slip Compensation                                   110  Equivalent Circuit Diagram for an Asynchronous Motor                          110  Speed Behavior with Slip Compensation                                      110  Regenerative Braking with External Braking Resistor                            115  Mechanical               S  0  a Python pane ae heeled xe Reda bie 117  LOGIC EINKING Of Aand     xcs s wth esce      e o EXER eR        118  Roller Conveyor with Rotary Table                                           123  Stop Function with Two Different Deceleration Times                           124  Operational Data Indicator                                                 127  Modbus Network with                                             2         131  Data Exchange Between Master and Slave                                    133  Dimensions and Frame Sizes  FS1 FS3  FS   Frame                                 148  Dimensions and Frame Sizes  FS4 and FS5  FS   Frame                              149  Equipment Supplied MMX COM PC                                          1 151  Fitting the MMX COM PC Connection Module                                
15.         ES  5    4 69 1   3j      22  119 0         B    110 0        2   e 11  Y    2  0 16     40   038   25 0   Q 7       P 3 15  80 0                              3 54  90 0     p 4 92  125 0       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive     04020003                 2013 www eaton com 183    Appendix       Approximate Dimensions in inches  mm     Door Keypad Dimensions                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2 77  70 3                  gt       3 94   100 2      Y      2 26 1   57 4          i 22  0 87 0 71     4 92  125 0       20  77  18 0       Front View Side View    184 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Appendix       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013  www eaton com 185    Appendix       186 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    ETN    Powering Business Worldwide    Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable  efficient and safe  power is available when it s needed most  With unparalleled  knowledge of electrical power management across industries   experts at Eaton deliver customized  integrated solutions to  solve our customers    most critical challenges     Our focus is on delivering
16.         Modification permissible   X   Modification only possible in STOP  ro rw Parameter read and write permissions via a fieldbus  connection  BUS           read only  rw   read and write  FS Factory setting of the parameters  User setting User setting of the parameters       Appendix A    Quick Configuration  Basis     When first switching on or after activating the default  settings  54 2   1   you are guided step by step through the  provided parameters by the quick start assistant  The defined  values are confirmed with the OK button or they can be  changed to suit your application and the motor data     The quick start assistant can be switched off in the first  parameter  P1 1  by entering a zero  access to all  parameters      In parameter P1 2  you can switch to the specified  application setting with the quick start assistant  see table on  Page 40      The quick start assistant ends this first cycle by automatically  Switching to frequency display  M1 1   0 00 Hz      By selecting the parameter level  PAR  again  besides the  selected parameters for the quick configuration  the system  parameters  S  are also shown in other cycles     Quick Start Parameter Guide  Full parameter guide begins on Page 164     Access                                                       FS User   PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P1 1 115 V rw Quick start parameters 0   All parameters  disable  67 1   1   Only quick configuration parameters    enable    P1
17.         PE L1 L2 L3 DC  DC   PEU VW PE R  R    1 1 1 1  A1 C1 A2 C2  Y Y Y Y  B1 A D1 B2 D2  Y Y Y Y                                  Stripping Lengths in the Power Section in inches  mm                             Supply Voltage  Input  Motor  Output  DC Link  Brake Resistor   L1  L2  L3         U T1  V T2  W T3 PE    DC  R   R   DC  PE      C1 D1 Al B1 C1 D1 Al B1 c2 D2 A2 B2  FS1 0 30  8 0  0 80  20 0  0 30  8 0  1 40  35 0  0 30  8 0  0 80  20 0  0 30  8 0  1 40  35 0  0 30  8 0  0 80  20 0  0 30  8 0  1 40  35 0   FS2 0 30  8 0  0 80  20 0  0 30  8 0  1 40  35 0  0 30  8 0  0 80  20 0  0 30  8 0  1 40  35 0  0 30  8 0  0 80  20 0  0 30  8 0  1 40  35 0   FS3 0 30  8 0  0 80 20 0  0 30 8 0  1 40  35 0  0 30 8 0  0 80 20 0  0 30 8 0  1 40  35 0  0 30 8 0  0 80 20 0  0 30 8 0  1 40  35 0   FS4 0 30  8 0  1 60  40 0  0 30 8 0  1 20 300  0 30 8 0  2 00  50 0  0 30 8 0  1 20 300  0 30 8 0  1 60  40 0  0 30 8 0  1 60  40 0   FS5 0 30 8 0  1 60  40 0  0 30 8 0  1 20  30 0  0 30 8 0  2 00 50 0  0 30 8 0  1 20 300  0 30 8 0  2 00 50 0  0 30 8 0  2 00  50 0   34 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Prevent the shielding from becoming unbraided  for example   by pushing the separated plastic covering over the end of the  shielding or with a rubber grommet on the end of the  shielding  As an alternative  in addition to a broad area cable  clip  you can also twist the shielding braid at the end and  connect to protective ground with a cab
18.         dd I ruber               Warnings and    Cautions  dssdo de a EE      xi  ABOUT THIS MANUAL  Writing  CONVENTIONS  452525                              Meee re ms ad 1  Abbreviations and Symbols                                 2         1  Input Supply Voltages                                              2  UJ EIS rn tea      ERN T Get                  dec e         2  M MAX SERIES OVERVIEW  Notes on the Second MMX Upgrade                                   3  Component dentification    eee e trees adel wien cedes des 4  Checking  the  Delivery      ses               RR RR ERR RUE      X YS 5  Nameplat    Rating  Data         eto eed ex SO eR rad 6  Catalog Number Selection    issus o ce ttg Own RR RA d ned 7  Technical Data and Specifications                                     9  Description  of the M MaX    iar p ee RERO ALHEE RR EN ve 13  Feature S    a odas d    at                 Eden Neb daba e n ens 13  Selection Criteria       P PRETI POP M RUM SR ERE 15  Proper USE        Last idee debo ed es s                              ee                16  Maintenance and Inspection                                         16  St  rag              iS Ew t                   C Rer des        17  Charging  DC Link Capacitors    iss voe ute e PRA RAE EI 17  Service abd  Warranty   i  psa ue dob pium ea      aed 17  ENGINEERING  INtPOGUCTION s ces RAE PAPA EV SIR ev wk Ge             She ots 18  Electrical Power Network                                           19  Safety arid
19.        P6 4                 Pe3                P6 3                                           The values for the acceleration time t4 and the deceleration time ty are calculated as follows        6 4   6 3  x P6 5    t      P6 4       6 4   6 3  x P6 6    to    2 P6 4   The defined acceleration  P6 5  and deceleration times  P6 6  apply for all changes to the  frequency setpoint value     If the start release  FWD  REV  is switched off  the output frequency        is immediately set  to zero  The motor runs down uncontrolled     If a controlled run down is requested  with value from P6 6   parameter P6 8 must be 1     Starting friction and load inertia can lead to longer acceleration times for the drive than are set  in P6 5  Large centrifugal masses or if driven by the load  the deceleration time of the drive  can be greater than is set in P6 6     Notes       When setting a minimum output frequency  P6 3 greater than 0 Hz   the acceleration and deceleration time of the  drive is reduced to t4 or 12   Reference points for the acceleration and deceleration times set in parameters P6 5 and P6 6 are always 0 Hz  P6 3  and  the maximum output frequency is fmax  P6 4      M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 83    Parameters    Drives Control  continued          Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P6 7 505 X     Start function 0  0 Ramp  acceleration     The acceleration time with the value set at paramete
20.       FBV  Feedback Value Check  message   5 1  2 3    2515    output if the actual value in RUN mode is below the lower limit  value P9 16  It stays active until     The actual value exceeds the upper limit value P   9 15  The frequency inverter switches from RUN mode to STOP mode                P9 16 1434          Hysteresis  lower limit 0 0  0 00 100  See P9 15   P9 17 1435        PID controller  max  controller deviation 3 0  0 00 10096 If the PID controller is activated  P9 1   1   and the deviation    between the setpoint and the actual value exceeds the value  entered here  the PID monitoring is activated  Setting at P5 1   2 3  2 12       P9 18 1475          PID controller  reference value scaling 1       0 1 32 7 Setpoint display  multiplication of a factor to display  process adjusted variables    The value is displayed in M1 17       P9 19 1476          PID controller  process variable scaling 1       0 1 32 7 Actual value indication  multiplication factor for displaying  process variables    The value is displayed in M1 18  P9 20 1478 V     PID controller  output signal limit 100 0  0 00 100 096                 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 97    Parameters    Activating Deactivating PID Controller    With a digital input  in FS DI6  configured as PID  PID control  can be switched on and off through control signal terminals   When you activate the PID input  PID control is disabled  The  frequency inverter then wo
21.       M2  Ns  M1  An           n2 n4 n   4        2    In  Speed control  mode  P11 8   1   the frequency inverter  can compensate these load related deviations  From the  measured voltage and current values of the stator winding   04 11  the internal motor model calculates the required  manipulated variables for the flux variable i  and the torque  variable iu  In the equivalent circuit diagram of the  three phase motor  the load related slip is shown as the  resistance R 2 s  In idle operation without a load  this  resistance approaches infinity  and approaches zero as the  load increases     Equivalent Circuit Diagram for an Asynchronous Motor                        2       uy Im                      Mn     o ng  1 2   3   Item   Number Description   1 Stator winding   2 Air gap   3 Transformed rotor winding       An exact calculation requires the precise rating specifications  of the motor  parameter group 7   The speed control  P11 8    1  can then compensate the load related slip deviations  The  simple illustration shows that  as the load torque increases  111  the resulting speed reduction is compensated by an  increase in the output frequency  2   see figure below      Speed Behavior with Slip Compensation                110 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com                         lt     V Hz Characteristic Curve  continued       Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P11 9 601 X     Carrier 
22.       Motor M2   011  FWD  control signal terminal 8  and DIG   2PS  control signal terminal 16  operation with parameter  group P14  second parameter set     Parameters          24V  FWD  REV  2PS                                              DI1  DI2                    24V Out   lt 50 mA                      011 4 012  ri  oia r2       U1     EJE        E         0 75 kW 1 5 kW                                  During maintenance and setting work the following applies  for reversing duty       Motor M1   DI2  REV  control signal terminal 9  operation  with parameter group P7      Motor M2   012  REV  control signal terminal 9  and DI6   2PS  control signal terminal 16  operation with parameter  group P14  second parameter set     Digital input DI6 is assigned in the factory setting  P3 12   6   with the function PI OFF  PID controller  deactivated   Setting  P3 12 2 0 is used to switch off this function of DI6  Setting  P3 27   6 enables the second parameter set  2PS  function  to be assigned to digital input 016     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 123    Parameters    Example 2    Stop function with two different deceleration times     Stop Function with Two Different Deceleration Times                                       50 mA        24   Out       The Stop function with deceleration time can be activated  with parameter P6 8   1  If the enable signal on the digital  input DI1  FWD  control signal terminal 8  is switched of
23.       eno        132  Modbus Process  Data ze               Eq Y       137  APPENDIX A  Special Technical  Datan cr vx euni Setter Gd        ED PA      ON d 142  Dimensions and Frame Sizes                                        148  PG Int  rtace      37     x e os e e vet                aun C ENSE Y utis 151  Mounting Frame for Fieldbus Connection                               153  PROFIBUS DP Fieldbus Interface Card                                 157  Cables  Fuses and Disconnect Devices                                 158       Parameters    xa a      arate ne enw An the        dhe AER AE aan m ean 161  APPENDIX B  Door Panel Keypad Adapter System   Mounting Instructions                180    iv M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    List of Figures          M Max Fre  guency Converter vum                    ny Ede RR         3  Control Signal Terminals and Microswitches                                   3  MeMax Series recan                      EE RUE CEU RUP SUM PE           ERA 4             SUPPLY sci  boc enh sce ater wack reb Oud Mee bee               dei d 5  Overview of the M Max Device  FS1 FS3                                    13  Overview of the M Max Device    54        FS5                                  13  Block Diagram  Elements of M Max Frequency Inverters                         14  SelectionGriterid   ce ek ee dae doen    ed Ek      nn Nu pde m ck dU OA 15  Drive 
24.      1 4 836 X      Power SW Version  power section software version        51 5 837 X 90xx Application ID       51 6 838 X X XX Application revision       51 7 839         System load           Load as percentage  96        Communication  Information on Interface RS485  Control Signal Terminals A  B      2 10 808    X     Communication status 0 000 6          xx   Number of error messages  0 64            Number of correct messages  0 999                       52 29  809             Fieldbus protocol 00  0 Fieldbus deactivated  1 Modbus RTU    2 30 8100 V     Slave address 16  1 255        2 45 8110 V     Baud rate 50       Transfer rate  1 Baud   1 symbol per second   The baud rate must be equal on the send and receive sides                               0   300 Baud   1   600 Baud   2   1200 Baud  1 2k Baud    3   2400 Baud  2 4k Baud    4   4800 Baud  4 8k Baud    5   9600 Baud  9 6k Baud    6   19200 Baud  19 2k Baud   7   38400 Baud  38 4k Baud   8   57600 Baud  57 6k Baud        Note       With a fieldbus connection  option  for example  CANopen  PROFIBUS       and so on  modified ID numbers and different factory settings are stored here   Detailed information is provided in the specific manuals of the relevant fieldbus interface card     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive     04020003                 2013 www eaton com 125    Parameters    System Parameter  continued                                                                                           Access 
25.      KEYPAD BUS    V    Display in Automatic Alternation    T    READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT      1               4    bd       FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS    Example  Main menu PAR  Parameter P1 1   The display automatically switches between the parameter number  and the defined value   P1 1  1 is displayed at the first switch on and after the factory  settings have been activated    Use the OK button to activate the selected parameter    The value  1  flashes   P1 1 21    The Quickstart Wizard is activated and guides you step by step  through the specific drive parameters  see Page 65        62 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Setting Parameters  continued    Parameters                                                       Sequence Commands Display Description  3       READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT If the parameter value is flashing  you can use the two arrow keys to  pu CA    change the value within the permitted range  REF                 pc NON pu       P1 1   You exit the Quickstart Wizard  access to all parameters     PAR  4               FLT     lt                 ee  FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS  READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT The selected value is confirmed with the OK button  P 1  Q REEL S 222     The display now changes automatically between the new value and  MON 11 11 the respective parameter number  PAR  4     FLT      v     FWD REV JO KEYPAD BUS  4 READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT The other parameters in the main menu PAR can be sel
26.      STOP   stop  no start command     The arrows  W  in the bottom status line show the controller  commands  Actuation is done via the control signal terminals   I O   Control Input Output  in the factory setting     The FWD mark  forward  designates the basic rotational  direction  phase sequence for a clockwise rotating field  on  connection terminals U T1  V T2 and W T3     The operating data of the output frequency is shown in the  LCD display in alternating sequence with M1 1 and 0 00 Hz   The arrow      the left hand status line indicates menu level  MON  Monitor   operating data display         52 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Operational Data Indicator  Operational        Operation       READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT  1  1   ner     T   REF p      a     monl      1       lt   Display in automatic alternation   gt         4                PAR  1          PAR  Li  Lu    FLT    ELT Hz     v v v v   FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS FWD REV 1 0 KEYPAD BUS       By actuating the OK button  you can set the display     mode to stay on the value for the output frequency   0 00 Hz    The start release is done by actuating one of the digital inputs  with  24V     e Terminal 8  FWD   Clockwise rotating field  Forward Run     e Terminal 9  REV   Counterclockwise rotating field   Reverse Run     The control commands are interlocked  exclusive OR  and  require a rising voltage edge     The start release  FWD  REV
27.     10V      GND 24V DI C DI1 DI2        R21 R22                   OURS or   i M3 e  mm  mm  AWG mm Nm ft lbs  0 14 1 5 0 25 0 5 26 16 5 0 22 0 25 0 16   0 18 04  25       Microswitches and Control Signal Terminals    Four microswitches are arranged under the cover plate  These are used to directly configure the  control signal terminals     Microswitch Factory Settings  Microswitch Description             GND DO  Di4 015 016 AO DO   R13R14   R24    4 5 13 14 15 16 18 20 22 23 26 51 LOGIC Control logic                  MOT        Positive logic  FS     3 6 7 8 9 10 25 24 S  66666685      OO ource type  A B    10V      GND 24V DI C DH DI2 013 R21R22       Negative logic     Sink           5 S2 AI Analog input 1  P2 1    V   0 10V  FS   mA   4 20 mA  S3 Al2 Analog input 2  P2 5           RS485     mA   4   20 mA  FS   53   AI2  mA  V 0 10V  S2   AM  V  S4 RS485 Bus terminating resistor   control signal terminal A B            Disconnected  Term    Switched on  terminator                             mA    LOGIC  All                   V  V                                        S1   LOGIC              M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 39    Installation    Control Signal Terminal Functions    The functions that are set in the ex factory and the electrical connection data of all control  signal terminals are listed in the following table     Factory Set Control Terminal Functions                                                        
28.     DI3  control signal terminal 10   FF1  fixed frequency  Control Logic Reaction to a Rising or Falling Edge TM e    Source Type  Sink Type     014  control signal terminal 14   FF2  fixed frequency  2   15 Hz     e DI5  control signal terminal 15   Reset  acknowledge error  message ALARM        DI6  control signal terminal 16   PID Off  lock of the PID  controller                                            The joint actuation of control signal terminal 10  FF1  and  control signal terminal 14  FF2  activates the fixed frequency  FF3  20 Hz  in the factory setting        The individual digital inputs  D    can be assigned several  functions  The assigned functions are activated if  with  LOGIC   the control signal terminal is actuated with  24V   rising edge  failsafe      M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 71    Parameters                                                                                           Digital Inputs  Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P3 1 300          Start Stop Logic 3  0 P3 2  FWD   P3 3  REV   REAF  REAF  Restart after Fault    Restart after an error message  Function same as P3 1 2 3  The automatic restart after an error message  FAULT  requires  setting P6 13   1  The rising edge of the control voltage at control signal terminal  8  P3 2  or control signal terminal 9  P3 3  is then not controlled  1 P3 2  FWD    P3 3   REV  see Example A on Page 76   2 P3 2  Start
29.     Jv  _     Block parameter access 0       Like P3 2       Assignment of control signal terminal  Blocks access to all parameters    Note  The resetting of all parameters to the default settings  via the STOP button  held down 5s  remains active       P3 18    1405    Motor potentiometer  increase value 0  Acceleration time  see  P6 5   acc1        Like P3 2    Assignment of control signal termina       P3 19    1406           Motor potentiometer  decrease value 0  Deceleration time  see  P6 6   dec1       Like P3 2    Assignment of control signal termina       P3 20    1407    J      Motor potentiometer  set value to zero 0       Like P3 2    Assignment of control signal termina       P3 21    1408    Jv  gt     PLC program start 0       Like P3 2       Assignment of control signal termina       74    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Parameters    Digital Inputs  continued          Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P3 22 1409 V     PLC program pause 0  Like P3 2 Assignment of control signal terminal    Pause will occur in between steps of the PLC program until  control signal is removed    P3 23 1410 V     Counter  input signal 0          Like P3 2 Assignment of control signal terminal  Counts the activation of the selected digital input  011 016     P3 24 1411        Counter  reset 0          Like P3 2 Assignment of control signal terminal    Resets the outputs   5 1   5 3   20 and or 21 a
30.    002   S           400Z    PI Ist   12  AB  0  4  20 mA  f Out    AO  o 10v L9     lt 10 mA           5  5       021          46 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    MMX12   F Block Diagram    NOEZ OV           f Soll  Tc  0   410 V          Run                   Error             A0EZ OV                                       002       25       0 4  20          e           000 65    Al2                        AO          o 10v   2  210 mA    SUIYO 3002            SUIYO 3002          Ready           lt 50 mA         DO                                 24V Out 24V  1          50 mA       FWD                REV            9         1                    FF2           Reset       PI Off                   C       021                      M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Installation    Installation    MMX32  MMX34 and MMX35 Block Diagram                                                                                                                                                            cies Eos     IT      2    edet ves                    v       i  mi c T L     w  5 w    eS  5 2 5  T z            E  EE m  oe i  R13                 R14 24V Out 24V  R21                 AR  Error R24  o   FWD      REV  10V Out                   7                          Soll       o                 0 10V   8 FF2      e    5 Reset       3  a  a PI Off                     gt  N          3 8  o o  3  
31.    10 8  are set in numerical order with the associated  run times    10 10   10 18  and rotating direction  FWD  as  setpoint     The start command  RUN  for the sequence control is set via  the digital input  011 016  defined at parameter P3 21  It has  a higher priority than other start commands  This also applies  to the fixed frequency setpoints of the sequence control  compared to setpoint sources        WARNING    If a start command is present at a digital input  011 016   assigned at P3 21  the sequence control also starts  automatically  without switch edge  when the power  supply is switched on  for example  after a power supply  failure      If the start command  RUN  is switched off during the  program cycle  the drive stops according to the settings at  P6 8  The program sequence is then ended immediately  A  renewed start command begins once more with the first  fixed frequency     A digital input  011 016         be assigned the  Pause  sequence control  function at parameter 3 22  The program  sequence is then stopped and can then be resumed from  this stopping point  fixed frequency      The operating states of the sequence control can be  displayed via the digital outputs RO1  RO2 and DO        The following assignments are shown in example A        Relay         P5 1   16  signals the operation  RUN  of  the sequence control  It switches on with the start  command and then off after one completed program cycle   P10 9   1  P10 9   3  at the end of the progr
32.    Removing the MMX COM PC Connection Module             M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 151    Appendix       When the power supply of the MMX frequency inverter is The active data transfer is indicated by the green flashing  switched on with the MMX COM PC fitted  the parameters COMM LED  The ERROR LED will be lit red in the event of a  can be copied via the two function keys  faulty or interrupted data transfer      Upload  The parameters from the frequency inverter Upload Download     AC DRIVE  are loaded in MMX COM PC  ADAPTER   JUL JUL      Download  The parameters are loaded from the ADAPTER                      ADAPTER  10 the frequency inverter  Geom  comm         O                 The MMX COM PC can also be supplied with a 9V battery or via an external 24V voltage  DC   instead of line voltage of the frequency inverters     Technical data for power supply   e 9V block battery  current consumption around 60 mA    e 24V plug power supply unit with 5 5 mm DC plug    Inserting the 9V Block Battery    2    ere  ES       b ure  AG  ms Q    P       C ERROR  AC DRIVE    9 Vdc    65 mA     TUE             1  Open the cover    2       block battery plug connection  3  Switch the microswitch to ON  COMM LED is lit    Note  Current consumption around 65 mA  Switch off 9V block battery after use   microswitch OFF  or remove battery  discharged within around 24h      152 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October
33.    the activation of the DC  braking occurs with the output frequency set under P12 3 with  the braking time set here    With P6 8   0  free run out   the activation of the DC braking  3   occurs directly with the stop command  If the output frequency   1  is greater than or equal to the rated motor frequency  P7 6    the value set here is considered for the duration of the braking   time   If the output frequency is less than or equal to 196 of the rated   motor frequency  P7 6   the duration for DC braking is reduced   respectively to 1096 of the value set here       Braking Time in Case of Stopping                                                                              10   P124                   114 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Regenerative Braking   If the rotor of an asynchronous motor is driven  oversynchronously in the direction of the rotating field  it  generates electric power via its stator windings  The motor  becomes a generator  In the frequency inverter  this  generative energy causes an increase in the DC link voltage     Oversynchronous speeds occur  for example  when the  output frequency in frequency inverter operation is reduced  with short deceleration times  the connected machine has a  large flywheel mass  or when the flowing medium in pumps  and fans works against the speed reduction     The rise in the DC link voltage is monitored by the M Max  frequency inverter and always enables a braking
34.    v v      FWD REV I O KEYPAD BUS   BACK  RESET            Description    If the supply voltage is switched on with the KEYPAD control  level set  the MON menu item is activated first  The set display  value is shown in automatic alternation  factory setting  M 1 1   lt  gt  0 00 Hz        Actuate the BACK RESET       and OK buttons in succession  The entry  level is then reactivated  see sequence 2                   2 MN      READY RUN STOP ALARM FAUL                   REF 47             agi                       4      FLT Hz    FWD     z    FWD REV 1 0 KEYPAD BUS  READY RUN STOP ALARM FAUL  REF           e   TN      JUI  PAR       4      FLT Hz    REV vw      J  FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS    The two arrow buttons   lt  or  gt   are used to change the rotating  direction  FWD  REV        The rotating direction change is carried out in the factory setting   P6 14   0  with an automatic stop at 0 Hz  For a direct changeover   FWD REV  you must set parameter P6 14   1   Note  The frequency of the REV rotating field direction is not  displayed with a negative sign   Note  When the setpoint entry is active  flashing number display   the  arrow buttons are used to change the entry locations  cursor        130    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Serial Interface  Modbus RTU     Serial Interface  Modbus RTU     General Information About Modbus    Modbus is a centrally polled bus system in which a so called master  PLC  controls the e
35.   3x6 3x10 3x6 3x10 6 10 2x6 2x10  MMX32AA017    3x6 3x10 3x6 3x10 6 10 2x6 2x10          2    025             2    031    3x10 3x8 3x8 3x8 10 8 2x10 2x8  MMX32AA038       MMX34AA1D3     3x1 5 3x16 3x1 5 3x16 1 5 16                  4    109     MMX34AA2DA       MMX34AA3DS3     2x1 5 2x16  MMX34AMDS     3x1 5 3x16 3x1 5 3x16 1 5 6 2x15 2x16  MMX34AA5DB      MMX34AA7D6    3x2 5 3x14 3x2 5 3x14 25 4 2  2 5 2  14  MMX34AA9DO       MMX34AA012          4    014    3  4 3  12 3  12 3  12 4 2 3  4 2x12                016    3x6 3x10 3x6 3x10 6 0 2x6 2x10  MMX34AA023      MMX34AA031     3x10 3x8 3x8 3x8 10 8 2x10 2x8  MMX34AA038      3x10 3x6 3x8 3x6 10 6 2x10 2x6                107    3x1 5 3x16 3x1 5 3x16 1 5 16 2x1 5 2x16  MMX35AA2D7                       9    3x25 3x14 3x25 3x14 25 14 2  2 5 2  14  MMX35AAGDI       MMX35AA9DO                  Notes     AWG   American Wire Gauge      UL fuse with AWG     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    159    Appendix       Specified Fuses and Disconnect Devices                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        5 i j _   Part No  M Max Uin  V  VDE  A  UL  A     Type Designation Type Designation Catalog No    MMXTIAAID7     TAC 1200V 10      20   4     O FABON     127   MMX11AA2D4    1 AC
36.   A CAUTION  Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram   Fire hazard     Only use cables  protective switches  and contactors that  feature the indicated permissible nominal current value        CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     Ground contact currents in frequency inverters are greater  than 3 5 mA  AC   According to product standard IEC EN  61800 5 1  an additional equipment grounding conductor  must be connected  or the cross section of the equipment  grounding conductor must be at least 0 39 in   10 mm       A WARNING    The components in the frequency inverter s power  section remain energized up to five  5  minutes after the  supply voltage has been switched off  intermediate  circuit capacitor discharging time      Pay attention to hazard warnings             DANGER    5 MIN    Note  Complete the following steps with the specified tools  and without using force     32 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Connection to Power Section    The following figure shows the general connections for the  frequency inverter in the power section     Three Phase Input Connection          PES          3 AC  PE                Connection to Power Section                         Installation    Terminal Designations in the Power Section    e L1  L2 N  L3  Connection terminals for the supply voltage   input  input voltage        Single phase AC voltage  connection to L2 N and
37.   A high torque at low speed causes a high thermal load on the  motor  If temperatures are too high  the motor should be  equipped with an external fan     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    A CAUTION    A high torque at low speed leads to a high thermal load on  the motor        CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram  DC braking results in additional heating of the  motor  Configure the brake torque  set via braking current   P12 1  and the braking duration  P12 2 and P12 4   as low as  possible        CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     The motor parameters must be identical in both parameter  groups  P7 and P14    A CAUTION    Although the registers to be written are consecutive  the ID  numbers of the parameter list are not  Only the ID numbers  in the process data list are consecutive        CAUTION    Fuses and cables selected must always comply with the  applicable regulations at the installation site     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com xiii    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    xiv M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    About this Manual    Writing Conventions  Symbols used in this manual have the following meanings     In order to make it easier to follow the manual  the name of  the current chapter is shown on the header of the left hand  page and the name of the current section i
38.   Example of Status  Displays  on Page 128    M1 17 20 PID reference value 0 0 96 Percentage of maximum setpoint   M1 18 21 PID feedback 0 0 96 Percentage of maximum actual value   M1 19 22 PID error value 0 0 96 Percentage of maximum fault value   M1 20 23 PID output 0 0 96 Percentage of maximum output value   M1 21 1480 Counter  digital input 0     Number of actuations of a digital input  DI1   DI6     assigned at P3 23  The reset command for the  counter is set at P3 24       Under the system parameters S3 1 to S4 1  see  System Parameter  on Page 125  you can  also display the operational data of the M Max frequency inverter and adjust the contrast of  the display unit     Example of Status Displays    The status displays of the digital inputs and outputs are equivalent  These make it possible to  check for whether an output control signal  for example  from an external controller  of the  inputs  DI1 to DI6  activates the frequency inverter  This provides you with a simple means for  checking the wiring  wire breakage      The following table shows a few examples   Display value    e 1   activated   High       0   not activated   Low    Status Displays Examples                                        Display  PNU ID Value Description  M1 14 15 0 No digital input  DI1  DI2  DI3  is actuated  1 Control signal terminal 10 is actuated  DI3   10 Control signal terminal 9 is actuated  DI2   100 Control signal terminal 8 is actuated  DI1   101 The control signal terminals 10 and
39.   Ke reete d baee bala Vete aa deeds  Digital                       m           E          ae M Punime  Acceleration and Deceleration Time                                          S Formed Curve for Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps                        Automatic Restart After Error Message  Two Start Attempts                       Motor Parameters from Ratings Plate                                         Circuits   Delta  Stat    iei s              teet o ede eee gp a NER S aed  Motor  Cooling                sk anre er OR MD UR I ER eae Soe aS  Calculation of Motor Temperature                                                              vi M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    42  42  42  43  43  43    44  44    45  45  46  47  48  53    53    54  55  56  56    60  61  61  64  64  68  69  69  70  71    71  76  76  77  78  83  84  85  88  88  92  92    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    List of Figures  continued          Function Chart for OD  PID System Deviation                                  98  PID Controller  Actual Value Message FBV                                    99  Block Diagram  Ventilation with    Two Stage Control                             99  Fixed Frequencies FF1  FF2 and               1       2                              100  Example  Activation of the Fixed Frequencies in the   Factory Setting with Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps                    100  Example A  Program Cycle Executed  
40.   Parallel connection of several motors    Large power difference  Pey  gt  gt  PMotor    e Switching in the output    11 8   1      Speed control  RPM  min   with slip compensation    e Single operation  only one motor   maximum one power  rating smaller    e High torque  requirement  exact motor data for the motor  calculation model     V Hz Characteristic Curve    Parameters    The V f characteristic  voltage frequency characteristic   represents a control procedure of the frequency inverter in  which the motor voltage is controlled in a specific ratio to the  frequency  If the voltage frequency ratio is constant  linear  characteristic   the magnetizing flux and the torque behavior  of the connected motor is virtually constant     In the standard application  the benchmark values for the  V Hz characteristic curve correspond with the rated  operational data of the connected motor  see the motor  ratings plate        Cut off frequency P11 2   Rated motor frequency  P7 6   Maximum frequency P6 4        Output voltage P11 3   Nominal motor voltage P7 5    The rating data of the V Hz characteristic curve is assigned  automatically and corresponds with the values of parameter  P7 5  nominal motor voltage  and P7 6  rated motor frequency      If you require other values for the V Hz characteristic curve   you must first set parameters P7 5 and P7 6  before you  change the parameters of the V Hz characteristic curve  shown here           Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value 
41.   When the MMX is switched on for the first time  it activates  the Quickstart Wizard to guide you step by step through the  drive parameters  alternating display of P1 1   1      First read  Parameters  starting on Page 60     You can access the parameters when P1 1   0  Pressing   BACK RESET   A   OK  leads you to the operating data  display MON  This is always displayed after the power supply  is switched off     The frequency inverter is ready to start when there is an  alternating display M1 1  lt    0 00 Hz        Pressing the OK button allows you to change the  alternating mode of the displayed value M1 1                  The frequency inverter is now ready for operation  and is  factory set for activation and frequency setting via the  control signal terminals  1 0   The STOP button is active in  this mode    The KEYPAD control level can be activated via the  LOC REM button  The menu level  4  moves to  REF and the displayed value switches to 0 00 Hz   default settings      mo              Pressing the OK button activates the setpoint entry   The right hand digit of the displayed 0 00 Hz  flashes     Use these two arrow buttons to select the  D entry digit  cursor                                  gt a Use these two arrow buttons to change  the frequency values  frequency set value    Changes are only possible when there is flashing at the entry    digit  press OK button      Press the START button to start  RUN  the drive in  the selected direction  default settings F
42.   e connect a voltage or capacitive loads  for example  phase  compensation capacitors     e connect multiple frequency inverters in parallel    e make a direct connection to the input  bypass     Observe the technical data and connection requirements  For  additional information  refer to the equipment nameplate or  label at the frequency inverter  and the documentation     Any other usage constitutes improper use     There are no plans for replacing or repairing individual  components of M Max frequency inverters     If the M Max frequency inverter is damaged by external  influences  repair is not possible  Dispose of the device in  accordance with the respectively applicable environmental  laws and provisions for the disposal of electrical or electronic  devices     Maintenance Interval       Clean cooling vents  cooling slits     If required       Check the fan function    6   24 months  depending on the environment        Filter in the switching cabinet doors  see manufacturer specifications     6   24 months  depending on the environment        Check the tightening torques of the terminals  control signal terminals  power terminals     Regularly       Check connection terminals and all metallic surfaces for corrosion    6   24 months  depending on the environment        Charge capacitors    12 months  see  Charging DC Link Capacitors  on Page 17       16 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Storage    If the frequency inver
43.   eror             te Ua tlt              wane inu aus er NE Ae ut 164  Digital INPUT      3s    hati ct ien e i bet            Cp ape ben ege Ph 165  Analog  Output                   sad  ee gp NU MERC                    E VES SAT 166  Digital Output  sace                     RU inb aee er cee        167  Drives  Control    sanc teins Pes ek                     EOM REP d EN 168  MOTO is          zo          eoe      diete doles titur                          ten eee  dett debat us 170  Protective FUNCTIONS  s rieres 2 s us             pude               EAR ERN REOR RET 170  PID  Gontrollet    er te ache obe T ed hk ibd               cela 171  Fixed Frequencies                 ec                          172  Viliz ChatacteriSticCUrVv8B          st  dae daos ets RS Not Ro e x d Idee 173  Brakingi d sisters ud    EE uhr ve ku T EE nek ava ed rt Sube 174  LOGIC FUNCTION a acne lee ct re ERR                                  175  Second Patameter Set    i          Ga    Roce            WE da      dou Ted        176  System Parameters  sss yasi tte dep tede ton cedet                   Bele                            177  Parameter Values Currently Being Measured                                  179  Door Keypad Components                                                4 180  Door Keypad Mounting Instructions                                         181  Door Keypad Mounting Instructions  continued                                182    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN0402
44.   is shown in the top status line     LCD display  by the arrow  A  switching from STOP to RUN     The frequency is shown with a minus sign with a start  release with a left rotating field  REV      Operation  RUN  via Control Signal Terminal  I O  with  Left Rotating Field  REV   for example   12 34 Hz     READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT  D X EE Cae LE            REF                      l 4     PAR  L 1     ELT  Hz                   YO KEYPAD BUS    You can now set the output frequency  0 60 Hz  and  therefore the speed of the connected AC motor  O nmotor   with the setpoint value potentiometer via terminal 2   proportional voltage signal 0   10     The change in output  frequency here is delayed based on the specified  acceleration and deceleration ramps  In the factory settings   these times are set to 3 seconds          The stop command can also be given via the STOP    button on the operating unit  The STOP button is     active in all operating modes  It can be disabled with  parameter  P6 16   0      A controlled run down can be set using parameter P6 8   STOP function   P6 8   1      The relevant deceleration time is set in parameter P6 6  The  acceleration time are set in parameter P6 5     Information on settings and the description of the  parameters used here are provided in  Drives Control  P6   on Page 82          The acceleration and deceleration ramps specify the  time change for the output frequency  from zero to  fmax  FS   60 Hz  or from fmax back to zero     Th
45.   with the  associated run times    10 11   10 18  and the corresponding values in binary and decimal  format     Depending on the selected rotating field direction  FWD REV   the decimal value is multiplied  by 0  2 FWD  or 1  2 REV   The sum of all decimal values forms the program number for  parameter P10 10     Determining the Program Number  P10 10                                                                    Fixed Frequency Values Example A Example B   See Figure on  See Figure on  Hz 8 Binary Decimal FWD REV Page 104  Page 105   FFO P10 1 P10 11 20 1 0 FWD 0 FWD 0  FFA P10 2 P10 12 21 2 0 FWD 0 FWD 0  FF2 P10 3 P10 13 22 4 0 FWD 0 FWD 0  FF3 P10 4 P10 14 23 8 0 FWD 0 FWD 0  FF4 P10 5 P10 15 24 16 0 FWD 0 FWD 0  FF5 P10 6 P10 16 25 32 0 FWD 0 FWD 0  FF6 P10 7 P10 17 26 64 0 FWD 0 REV 64  FF7 P10 8 P10 18 27 128 0 FWD 0 REV 128  Sequence control  program  FWD REV   P10 10   0 192    The fixed frequencies  FFO FF7  are only active if the run times  P10 11 P10 18  of the  associated parameters are set   gt 05      102 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com                         lt     The run times in the individual program steps must be  Dan AFF x P6 5   greater than the transition times for the subsequent tFF    frequency value  Example as per figure on Page 104 P6 4   Example A     ion ti 2  P10 3 P10 4  x P6 5 _  40 Hz 20 Hz     3s  Acceleration time P6 5   3 0s P10 13      gt  18  Maximum frequency P6 4   60 Hz P6 4 60 
46.  1   Control signal 1   Control signal 1   Control signal Primary remote control  terminals  I O  terminals  1 0  terminals  1 0  terminals  1 0  source   I O   I O   I O   I O   P6 2 3   AI  analog 3   All  analog 3   AI  analog 3   AI  analog Primary remote speed  setpoint 1  setpoint 1  setpoint 1  setpoint 1  reference  P6 3 00 00 Hz 20 00 Hz 20 00 Hz 00 00 Hz Minimum frequency  P6 4 60 00 Hz 60 00 Hz 60 00 Hz 60 00 Hz Maximum frequency  P6 5 3 0s 5 0s 20 0s 1 0s Acceleration time  acc1   P6 6 3 0s 5 0s 20 0s 1 0s Deceleration time  dec1   P6 7 0   Ramp 0   Ramp 0   Ramp 0   Ramp Start function   acceleration   acceleration   acceleration   acceleration   P6 8 0   Free coasting 1   Deceleration 0   Free coasting 0   Free coasting Stop function  time  ramp   P7 1 le le le le Motor  rated current  P7 3 1720 RPM 1720 RPM 1720 RPM 1720 RPM Motor  rated speed  RPM   P7 4 0 85 0 85 0 85 0 85 Motor  power factor   cos      P7 5 230 460 575V    230 460 575V    230 460 575V    230 460 575V    Motor  rated operating  voltage  P7 6 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz Motor  rated frequency  P11 7 0   Deactivated 0   Deactivated 0   Deactivated 1   Enabled Torque increase  M1 1 0 00 Hz 0 00 Hz 0 00 Hz 0 00 Hz Output frequency   display only   Notes       230V   MMX11_  MMX12   MMX32      400V           4   575V   MMX35    This parameter will default based on style of unit     66    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E    October 2013    www eaton com                         lt    
47.  1   Even 1 Stop bit  2   04411 Stop bit                           52 7 814 V rw Timeout up to fieldbus 0   Not used 0  error  error 53  if no 1  1s  master messages are  received although 2 25  Modbus is still active     255   up to 2555    2 8 815     rw Reset communication 0   Not used 0  status    1   resets parameter S2 1  xx and yyy are reset to O       Drives Control       P6 1 125 V rw Control place 1 1   Control signal terminals  I O  1  2   Control unit  KEYPAD   3   Interface  BUS    P6 2 117  4 rw Setpoint Source 0   Fixed frequency  FFO  3  1   Control unit  KEYPAD   2   Interface  BUS   3   All  analog setpoint 1        4   Al2  analog setpoint 2        Note       When the fieldbus is connected  option  for example  CANopen  PROFIBUS DP  and so on  modified ID numbers and different factory settings are stored here   Detailed information is provided in the specific manuals of the relevant fieldbus interface module     132 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Serial Interface  Modbus RTU     For Modbus to function at least the following parameters must be set                       PNU Value Notes   52 2 1 To activate Modbus   52 3 1 255 Set differently at each slave  MMX   0 is used by the master for broadcasts   524 0 8 Same setting at the master and slave   S2 6 0 1 Same setting at the master and slave   6 1 3 Fieldbus selected as a control level   6 2 2 Set setpoint value via the fieldbus  other setpoint sources al
48.  1 00 89 0 85   cos      see motor rating plate     7 5 110    rw Motor  rated operating voltage 180    500V 89      see motor rating plate   P7 6 111 X rw Motor  rated frequency 30 320 Hz 89 60 00   see motor rating plate   P11 7 109 X rw Torque increase 0   Deactivated 109 0  1   Enabled  M1 1 1 X ro Output frequency Hz 127 0 00  System Parameters in the Quick Start  Access  FS User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting   1 1 833 X ro API SW ID     125       12 834 X ro API SW Version      125 m   1 3 835 X ro Power SW ID    125     1 4 836 X ro Power SW Version      125       1 5 837 X ro Application ID     125      51 6 838    ro Application revision     125      51 6 838 X ro System load     125      5219 808 X ro Communication status RS485 in             format 125         Number of error messages   0   64            Number of correct messages   0   999   S220 809 V rw Fieldbus protocol 0   FB disabled 125 0  1  Modbus  5239 810      rw Slave address 1 255 125 1  S240 811      rw Baud rate 0 300 125 5  1 600  2  1200  3   2400  4   4800  5   9600  Notes       Factory settings dependent on specific drive selected   G These parameters are overwritten with the bus specific parameters when a fieldbus connection  for example  CANopen  is used   The parameter values described in the manual of the fieldbus interface then apply     162 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Appendix       System Parameters in 
49.  120V  10  20 20 FAZ B20 1N       MMX11AA2D8    AC 120V  10  20 20 FAZ B20 1N       MMX11AA3D7 AC 120V  10  20 20 FAZ B20 1N       MMX11AA4D8    AC 120V  10  32 30 FAZ B32 1N       MMX12AA1D7    AC 240V  10  10 10 FAZ B10 1N       MMX12AA2D4    AC 240V  10  10 10 FAZ B10        MMX12AA2D8    AC 240V  10  10 10 FAZ B10 1       MMX12AA3D7    AC 240V  10  10 10 FAZ B101        MMX12AA4D8    1 AC 240V  10  20 20 FAZ B20 1       MMX12AA7DO    1 AC 240V 41096 20 20 FAZ B20 1       MMX12AA9DB    1 AC 240V  10  32 30 FAZ B32 1       MMX32AA1D7    3 AC 240V  10  6 6 FAZ B6 3 PKMO0 6 3 XTPM6P3BNL   MMX32AA2D4    3 AC 240V  10  6 6 FAZ B6 3 PKMO0 6 3 XTPM6P3BNL   MMX32AA2D8    3 AC 240V  10  6 6 FAZ B6 3 PKMO 6 3 XTPM6P3BNL   MMX32AA3D7    3 AC 240V  10  6 FAZ B6 3 PKMO 6 3 XTPM6P3BNL        2    408    3 AC 240V  10  10 10 FAZ B10 3 PKM0 10 XTPM010BNL        2    700    3 AC 240V  10  10 10 FAZ B10 3 PKM0 10 XTPM010BNL        2    011    3 AC 240V  10  20 20 FAZ B20 3 PKM0 20 XTPM020BNL  MX32AA012           240V  10  20 20 FAZ B20 3 PKMO0 20 XTPMO20BNL  MX32AA017           240V  10  25 25 FAZ B25 3       0 25         025        MX32AA025           240V  10  32 40 FAZ B32 3 PKMO0 32 XTPM032BNL  MX32AA031           240V  10  40 40 FAZ B40 3 PKM4 40 XTPMO40BNL           2    036           240V  10  50 50 FAZ B50 3 PKM4 50 XTPMO50BNL   MMX34AA1D3    3 AC 480V  10  6 6 FAZ B6 3 PKMO 6 3 XTPM6P3BNL   MMX34AA1D9    3 AC 480V  10  6 6 FAZ B6 3 PKMO 6 3 XTPM6P3BNL   MMX34AA2D4    3 AC 480V  10 
50.  151  Removing the MMX COM PC Connection Module                              151  Upload                                                 fu EP 152  Dowrtload i osa ia arta ertt to ca                B c M traer te 152  Inserting the 9V Block Battery  cse dete RS lee ERO RUE VR ME ios 152  Power  Supply 4   suo nuda etude acea dtr tuk eb cr ref d mA e ots 153  Parameter Software MaxConnect                                            153  MMX NET XA Mounting Frame                                             153  Removing the Interface Cover on the M Max                                  153  Fitting and Connecting the Mounting Plate of the MMX NET XA                   154  Cover of the MMX NET XA for Holding the Fieldbus Interface Card                 154  Connecting the Interface Card with the Frequency Inverter                       154  MMX NET XB Interface                                                         155  Remove Cover  FSA ESb     s aea tt os trem             e ets dat e t tu de 155  Mounting Accessories for FSA FS5                                         155  Plastic Bridge for Holding the Control Terminals                                155  Connecting the MMX NET XB Interface Module with   thesEieldbusInterface  Cards                 Foote Mbmem uet 324 156  XMX NET PD A PROFIBUS DP Fieldbus Interface Card   with Nine Pole Sub D Plug Connection                                   157  Fi  ldb  s ConnectiOn          oe esee hk e IR ob To           c UT es 157  XMX N
51.  16  in RUN mode  It remains active until     e The actual value exceeds the upper limit value  P9 15        e The frequency inverter changes from RUN mode to STOP  mode  deceleration with the set ramp time     98 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013  www eaton com    PID Controller  Actual Value Message FBV    i      9 15                     9 16                               Number Description   1 Output frequency  Hz    2 Actual value  process variable PV        FWD  Start signal  clockwise rotating field   FBV  Actual value message  limit values exceeded  P9 15  P9 16      The upper and lower actual value limits  P9 15  P9 16  are   process messages     They cannot be used for monitoring  the actual value signal  FBV is not a fault message     When   5 1   5 3   25  you can set the digital output or a  signalling relay for the FBV     The FBV actual value message enables the M Max PID  controller to implement a direct  two stage control   as is  commonly used for HVAC applications     Example  Ventilation system with two fans  frequency  inverter   Under normal operating conditions  the  maximum output power of fan 1  M1  is sufficient  to maintain the actual value  PV  at the reference  value  When fan 1 is fully used and additional  airflow is required  a second fan  M2  with  constant power is a simple solution     Parameters    Block Diagram  Ventilation with  Two Stage Control                                        PV           1  FBV  S
52.  2 540 X rw Application 0   Basic 67 0   1   Pump drive   2   Fan drive   3   High load  P1 3 1472 X rw Country specific default 0   EU 67 1   settings 1  NA   P6 1 125      rw Primary remote control source 1   Control signal terminals  1 0  82 0   2   Control unit  KEYPAD    3   Fieldbus  BUS   P6 2 117 V rw Primary remote speed reference   Fixed frequency          82 3   1   Control unit  KEYPAD      Fieldbus  BUS    3   All  analog setpoint 1    4   A2  analog setpoint 2    5   Motor potentiometer  P6 3 101 X rw Minimum frequency 0 00   P6 4 Hz 83 0 00  P6 4 102 X rw Maximum frequency P6 3   320 00 Hz 83 60 00  P6 5 103 X rw Primary acceleration time  acc1  0 1   3000s 83 3 0  P6 6 104 X rw Primary deceleration time  dec1  0 1   3000s 83 3 0  P6 7 505 X rw Start function 0   Acceleration time  ramp  84 0   1   Flying restart circuit  P6 8 506 X rw Stop function 0   Fee coasting 84 0    1   Deceleration time  ramp        M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 161    Appendix       Quick Start Parameter Guide  continued  Full parameter guide begins on Page 161                                                                                      Access  FS User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P7 1 113 X rw Motor  rated operational current 0 2 x lg 2 x le 89 le   see motor rating plate   P7 3 112 X rw Motor  rated speed 300 20000 RPM 89 1720   see motor rating plate   P7 4 120 X rw Motor  power factor 0 30
53.  2013 www eaton com    Power Supply       cc         24Vdc    50 mA   Article No  207874       5 5 mm  0 22 in          The MMX COM PC can also be fed with a 12 to 24 Vdc  external power supply  The connection is implemented using  a 5 5 mm power supply plug     Note  Further information on using the MMX COM PC  connection module is provided      11040120047     MaxConnect    The MaxConnect parameter software allows fast parameter  assignment  operation  diagnostics and documentation   printout and storage of parameter lists  via a PC and the data  transfer with an M Max frequency inverter  MaxConnect is  stored on the enclosed CD and is available free of charge for  download  It may also be downloaded from the internet  Visit  www Eaton com drives     Parameter Software MaxConnect               3 4m  133 86 in           Appendix A    Mounting Frame for Fieldbus Connection    MMX NET XA    The MMX NET XA mounting frame enables the mounting  and connection of fieldbus interface cards to the frequency  inverters in frame sizes FS1  FS2 and FS3     MMX NET XA consists of the two housing sections        The mounting plate with the 24 pole slot  pluggable  connection cable and the ground terminal  shielding  GND   PE       The cover for holding and protecting the fieldbus interface  card       Note  Detailed installation instructions are provided in  110401200097     MMX NET XA Mounting Frame                                        Note  The MMX NET XA mounting frame is not supplie
54.  5           J  FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS    By actuating the OK button  the number of operating days  Q  for example  d   13 days  until this fault message is displayed  You can also show the respective hours  H  and minutes  M  of    operation with the arrow button            READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT     21  15           YO KEYPAD BUS       You exit the fault log  FLT  with the BACK RESET button  The   arrow moves to MON in the menu level       Use the OK button to activate the operating data display now or  select another menu level with the arrow keys     or v          M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 59    Parameters    Parameters    Control Unit    The following figure shows the elements of the M Max s    integrated control unit     View of the Keypad with LCD Display  Function Keys    and Interface  LCD   Liquid Crystal Display     READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT             REF   4                       vedi BEL AI IC IC ICI    WM UM  1717 17         PAR  4                           FLT q mAVs   k Hz        F rom MkWh       Vv v      w    FWD REV I O KEYPAD BUS                         Control Unit Elements  Operating Unit Element    READY RUN  STOR ALARM FAUL                2 888856    P   nl oy 5                  MkWh             PWD REV 16 KEYPAD BUS    Explanation    Backlit liquid crystal display  LCD   Plain text with alphanumeric characters          BACK  RESET       Acknowledge fault message  Reset     Activates the se
55.  5  The value set here determines the lowest permissible torque  limit  This function can also be used with output frequencies  that are above the cutoff frequency  P11 2  field weakening  point   Note  The value set here is reset automatically to the factory  setting  50 0   if the parameter for the motor rated current   P7 1  is changed  Underload Limit     1      812                     ME    P8 13                 5 Hz P11 2 f  P8 13 715     Underload  low torque limit at zero frequency       5 150  Motor torque    The value set here determines the lowest permissible torque  limit at zero frequency  range 0 5 Hz     Note  The value set here is reset automatically to the factory  setting  50 096  if the parameter for the motor rated current   P7 1  is changed       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013  www eaton com    93    Parameters    Protective Functions  continued    Access  PNU ID RUN    Value Range    Factory Setting  Description  P1 3        P8 14 733         Fieldbus error 2       Reaction to a fieldbus error if the fieldbus is set as active control  level  BUS   P6 1   2  P6 17   2        Deactivated       Alarm  AL 53        Fault  F   53   stop function according to P6 8       P8 15 734 V    Fieldbus interface error 2       Reaction to a fieldbus interface error  slot  at the frequency  inverter or when the fieldbus interface card is missing when the  fieldbus is set as active control level  BUS   P6 1   2  P6 17   2        Deactiv
56.  6 6 FAZ B6 3 PKMO 6 3 XTPM6P3BNL   MMX34AA3D3    3 AC 480V  10  6 6 FAZ B6 3 PKMO 6 3 XTPM6P3BNL   MMX34AA4D3    3 AC 480V  10  10 10 FAZ B10 3 PKMO0 10 XTPMO10BNL   MMX34AA5DB    3 AC 480V  10  10 10 FAZ B10 3 PKMO0 10 XTPMO10BNL   MMX34AA7DG            480V  10  20 20 FAZ B20 3 PKMO0 20 XTPMO20BNL   MMX34AA9D0           480V  10  20 20 FAZ B20 3 PKMO 20 XTPM020BNL   MMX34AA012    3 AC 480V  10  20 20 FAZ B20 3 PKMO 20 XTPM020BNL   MMX34AA014    3 AC 480V  10  25 25 FAZ B25 3 PKMO0 25 XTPM025BNL   MMX34AA016    3 AC 480V  10  25 25 FAZ B25 3 PKMO0 25 XTPM025BNL   MMX34AA023            480V  10  32 40 FAZ B32 3 PKMO0 32 XTPM032BNL   MMX34AA031             480V  10  40 40 FAZ B40 3 PKM4 40 XTPMO40BNL   MMX34AA038             480V  10  50 50 FAZ B50 3 PKM4 50 XTPMO50BNL   MMX35AA1D7    3 AC 575V  10  6 6 FAZ B6 3 PKMO0 6 3 XTPM6P3BNL   MMX35AA2D7    3 AC 575V  10  6 6 FAZ B6 3 PKMO0 6 3 XTPM6P3BNL   MMX35AA3D9    3 AC 575V  10  6 6 FAZ B6 3 PKMO0 6 3 XTPM6P3BNL   MMX35AA6D1    3 AC 575V  10  10 10 FAZ B10 3       0 10         010       MMX35AA9D0    3 AC 575V  10  20 20 FAZ B20 3 PKMO0 20 XTPM020BNL   Notes      Fuse UL rated  Class J  600V       len 10 kA     160 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    List of Parameters    The abbreviations used in the parameter lists have the  following meaning                       PNU Parameter number  ID Identification number of the parameter  RUN Access to the parameters during operation  RUN 
57.  8 are actuated  DI3   DI1   111 The control signal terminals 10 and 9 and 8 are actuated  DI3   DI2   DI1   M1 15 16 1 Control signal terminal 14 is actuated  DI14   10 Control signal terminal 15 is actuated  DI15   100 Control signal terminal 16 is actuated  0116   M1 16 17 1 Transistor DO is actuated  The transistor switches the voltage connected at control signal terminal 20  DO   to control signal  terminal 13  DO    10 Relay RO2 is actuated  The control signal terminals 25  R21  and 26  R24  are connected  closed changeover contact   100 Relay RO1 is actuated          N O contact  control signal terminal 22  R13  and 23  R14  is closed       128 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Parameters    Setpoint Input  REF     REF  Setpoint value definition  Reference  via the operating unit     The settings of the frequency setpoint via the keypad have the same effect as the function of  an electronic motor potentiometer  The set value is written in parameter P6 15 and can also  be changed there  It is retained also with a disconnection of the supply voltage     A frequency reference value that is set under REF is only effective with the KEYPAD control  level activated     The following table shows a good example of specifying the frequency setpoint value via the  operating unit     Setpoint Input  REF                          Sequence Commands Display Description  1 Activate control level KEYPAD with the LOC REM button          a
58.  As a  result  the current distortion is greater than in a single motor  circuit  To reduce the current distortion  you should use  motor reactors  see  1  in figure above  in the output of the  frequency inverter     The current consumption of all motors connected in parallel  must not exceed the frequency inverter s rated output  current I2N     Electronic motor protection cannot be used when operating  the frequency inverter with several parallel connected  motors  You must  however  protect each motor with  thermistors and or overload relays     The use of a motor protective circuit breaker at the frequency  inverter s output can lead to nuisance tripping     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E    October 2013 www eaton com 23    Engineering    Motor and Circuit Type    The motor s stator winding can be connected in a star or  delta configuration  in accordance with the rated operational  data on the nameplate     Example of a Motor Ratings Plate                         230 400 Y V  S1 0 75 kW  1430 RPM                                                    Star and Delta Circuit Types    U1      wi       w2  U2  V2 A A V2       The three phase motor with the rating plate based on the    figure shown above  can be run in a star or delta connection     The operational characteristic curve is determined by the  ratio of motor voltage and motor frequency  in this case     87 Hz Characteristic Curve    In the delta circuit with 400V and 87 Hz  the motor shown in  
59.  DO max  48 Vdc   terminal 13 max  50 mA  22 R13 Relay 1  normally open contact Active   RUN    Maximum switching load   250 Vac 2A or 250 Vdc 0 4A  23 R14 Relay 1  normally open contact Active   RUN    Maximum switching load   250 Vac 2A or 250 Vdc 0 4A  24 R22 Relay 2  changeover contact Active   FAULT    Maximum switching load    N C  250 Vac 2A or 250 Vdc 0 4A  25 R21 Relay 2  changeover contact Active   FAULT    Maximum switching load   250 Vac 2A or 250 Vdc 0 4A  26 R24 Relay 2  changeover contact Active   FAULT    Maximum switching load       0  250 Vac 2A or 250 Vdc 0 4A  A A RS485 signal A BUS communication Modbus RTU  B B RS485 signal B BUS communication Modbus RTU  Note       Programmable function  see  List of Parameters  on Page 161      40    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Analog Inputs  Connection area of the analog and digital inputs and outputs     Control Signal Terminals  Digital and  Analog Inputs Outputs        The M Max frequency inverter has two analog inputs for  specifying the frequency setpoint value and the actual value  return to the PI controller     e Control signal terminal 2    11   voltage signal 0  2   10V   input resistance 200k ohms    e Control signal terminal 4    12   current signal 0  4  20 mA   Load resistance 200 ohms    Adjusting and the parameter definition of analog inputs are  described in  Analog Input  P2   on Page 68     The Al1 analog input  control signal terminal 2  is fac
60.  External brake actuated  Switch threshold  set value of P12 8       27    Current monitoring  Switch threshold  set value of P5 8       28    Fieldbus  remote output    The assigned digital output is written directly to the general  control word  ID 2001  bit 13        P5 2 314 V        RO2 signal  relay output 2  3       Like P5 1    Assignment of the function       P5 3 312             DO Signal  Digital Output  1       Like P5 1    Assignment of the function       P5 4 315             Frequency monitoring 1 0       Monitoring of the selected frequency range    Actuate output if frequency is below or above Frequency  monitoring 1 reference value defined by P5 5     A monitoring message can be implemented via the digital  outputs  P5 1       2  P5 3   10        Deactivated       0 00 P5 5 Hz frequency is below reference P5 5       P5 5 P6 4 Hz frequency is above reference P5 5   P6 4   maximum frequency        M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 79    Parameters    Digital Outputs  continued                               Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P5 5 316        Frequency monitoring 1 reference value 0 00  0 00 P6 4 Hz P6 4 2 maximum frequency  P5 6 346 V     Frequency monitoring 2 0  Monitoring of the selected frequency range   see P5 5 for explanation   A monitoring message can be implemented via the digital  outputs  value 11   P5 1       2  P5 3   0 Deactivated  1 0 00 P5 7 Hz frequenc
61.  ID number of the first written  register is 2001  dec  as the master PLC has an offset of  1  0003 Total number of requested registers   42001   42103   06 Number of consecutive data bytes   3 registers x 2 bytes   6 bytes   0001 Content  2 bytes  for register 42101   0000 0000 0000 0001  bin   Start command   0000 Content  2 bytes  for register 42102   0000  dec   no content  as not used   2710 Content  2 bytes  for register 42103   10 000  dec   frequency setpoint   100 0096   D125 CRC          Slave response  05 10 0700 0003 8101  hex                    Hex Name  05 Slave address  10 Function code  here  Writing of the holding registers   07D0 2000  dec   The ID number of the first written register  is 2001  dec  as the master PLC has an offset of  1  0003 Total number of requested registers   42001   42103   8101 CRC       Function code 10  hex  can be used for broadcasting     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 141    Appendix       Appendix A    Special Technical Data   The following tables show the technical data of the M Max frequency inverter in the individual  power classes with the allocated motor output    The motor output allocation is based on the rated operational current     The motor output designates the respective active power output to the drive shaft of a  normal  four pole  internally or externally ventilated three phase asynchronous motor with  1 500 RPM at 50 Hz or 1 800 RPM at 60 Hz                       
62.  L3 on  MMX11_    e Single phase AC voltage  Connection to L1 and L2 N  with MMX12_    e Three phase AC voltage  Connection to  L1  L2   L3 with          2   MMX34        MMX35      e U T1  V T2  W T3  Connection terminals for the  three phase line to the AC motor  output  frequency  inverter     e    PE  connection for protective ground  reference  potential   PES with mounted cable routing plate for  shielded cables       R       Connection terminals for external brake resistance   only with         2   MMX34        MMX35   output  braking transistor         MMX32   MMX34   MMX35              Input  L2 N  L3    Output                                                    Ground Connection    PZ2       M4  11 5 Ib in    PE  D  1 3 Nm  A    1       BNET 0 17 in     4 3 mm              The ground connection is connected directly with the cable  clamp plates     The shielded cables between the frequency inverter and the  motor should be as short as possible  Connect the shielding  on both ends and over a large surface area with protective  ground PES  Protective Earth Shielding   You can connect the  shielding of the motor cable directly to the cable clamp plate   360 degrees coverage  with the protective ground     The frequency inverter must always be connected to the  ground potential via a grounding cable  PE      M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 33    Installation    Connection in Power Section                                   
63.  M6       28 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Fastening on Mounting Rails  FS1   FS3     As an alternative  you can also fasten FS1 FS3 to a mounting  rail conforming with IEC EN 60715     Mounting Rail Conforming with IEC EN 60715      gt           ee t    35       ik          Y v    15          Set the frequency inverter onto the mounting rail  1  from  above and press until it rests in place  2      Fastening to the Mounting Rail                            Dismantling from Mounting Rails    To remove the device  push the spring loaded clip down  A  marked cutout is provided on the upper edge of the M Max  device  A flat bladed screwdriver  blade width 0 20 in  5 mm    is recommended for pushing the clip down     Demounting     S       6   25       20 20 in  F4                 25 mm                    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Installation    Cable Flange Plate  Accessories     The M Max is supplied with a cable routing plate and  brackets  These enable you to arrange the connection cables  as required on the frequency inverter and fasten the shielded  cables in accordance with EMC requirements     First  install the cable clamp plate for the connection lines in  the power section  1  and then the cable clamping plate  2   for the control lines  The required installation screws  M4  are  included as standard     3    gland plates in the power section     Mount the ca
64.  Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Appendix A    Parameters marked with  M   Monitor  are values currently being measured  variables  calculated from these measured values  or status values from control signals     The M parameters cannot be edited  only display values      Parameter Values Currently Being Measured                                                                            Access  FS User   PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  Display Values  M1 1 1 ro Output frequency Hz 127 0 00  M12 25 ro Frequency reference value Hz 127 0 00  M1 3 2 ro Motor shaft speed RPM  calculated value  RPM  127 0    1 4 3 ro Motor current A 127 0 00  M1 5 4 ro Motor torque 96  calculated value  127 0 0    1 6 5 ro Motor power 96  calculated value  127 0 0  M17 6 ro Motor voltage V 127 0 0    1 8 7 ro DC bus voltage V 127 0 0    1 9 8 ro Unit temperature  F19C  127 0    1 10 9 ro Motor temperature 96  calculated value  127 0    1 11 3      Analog input 1 90 127 0 0    1 12 4 ro Analog input 2 90 127 0 0  M1 13 26 ro Analog output 1 90 127 0 0  M1 14 5 ro Digital inpu DI1  DI2  DI3 status 127 0    1 15 6 ro Digital inpu DM  DI5  DI6 status 128 0  M1 16 7      Digital output RO1    02  DO status 128 1  M1 17 20 ro PID reference value   128 0 0    1 18 21      PID feedbac   128 0 0    1 19 22      PID error value   128 0 0  M1 20 23 ro PID output   128 0 0    1 21 1480      Counter  digital input     128 0       M 
65.  RPM  min    2106 32106  42106 Motor current 0 01      2107 32107  42107 Motor torque 0 1         of the nominal value   2108 32108  42108 Motor power 0 1         of the nominal value   2109 32109  42109 Motor voltage 0 1 V   2110 32110  42110 DC link voltage  DC  1 V   2111 32111  42111 Current error     Error code  E      138 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013  www eaton com    Serial Interface  Modbus RTU     Status Word  ID 2101   Information on the device status and messages are defined in the status word                                                           Description  Bit Value   0 Value   1  0 Drive not ready Ready for operation  READY   1 Stop Running operation message  RUN   2 Clockwise rotating field  FWD  Anticlockwise rotating field  REV   3      fault Fault detected  FAULT   4 No warning Warning active  ALARM   5 Acceleration ramp Frequency actual value equals setpoint value definition  6     Zero speed  7 Speed control deactivated Speed control activated  8 15 Not used  General Status Word  ID 2102    Description  Bit Value   0 Value   1  0     Control level   Fieldbus  BUS   1     Setpoint input   Fieldbus  BUS   2 10 Not used  11 Remote input not active Remote input active   The status of a selected digital input  P3 28  is read out   12 Actuation  P3 37  not active Actuation  P3 37  active  13     Control level   Control signal terminals  1 0   14     Control level   KEYPAD  15    Control level   Fieldbus  BUS           A
66.  Slave Response  The length of the data block  Data  N x 1 Byte  depends on e  f the master request contains a write register function  the function code  This consists of two hexadecimal  function code 06 or 16   the frequency inverter  character sets between 00 and FF  The data block contains immediately returns the request as a response  additional information for the slave in order to carry out the      72   operation defined by the master in the function code    2         function code 03 or 04   the frequency inverter returns the    Example  number of parameters to be processed     CRC    The telegrams in the Modbus RTU have a CRC  Cyclical  Redundancy Check   This CRC field consists of two bytes  that contain a binary 16 bit value  The CRC check is always  run independently of the parity check for the individual  characters of the telegram  The CRC result is attached to the  end of the telegram by the master  The slave recalculates  while receiving the telegram and compares the calculated  value with the actual value in the CRC field  If both values are  not identical  an error is set     Structure of the Slave Response  Required Transfer Time    e The time between receiving a request from the master  and the response of the frequency inverter is at least  3 5 characters  rest time     e Once the master has received a response from the  frequency inverter  it must wait for at least the rest time  before it can send a new request    read data with the slave address and 
67.  SwitChinG                      Use non testate e e d ces c ere Yl 21  EMC Measures 2   x                         ante abet        s ten 22  Motor and Application                                              4 23  INSTALLATION  INTRODUCTION indes x EE Ree        REG QeQETEZAPA UAE LAE efe HRS 26  Installation  InsStr  ctions                                    26                       aote ar maces o e      Hetero hern ds 30  El amp ctucal Installation   5 202        tet m t oe ett d ets ele e a          32  OPERATION  Commissioning Checklist        ees RAE EPIS E 50  Operational Hazard Warnings    sss nes                   RE Ys 51  Commissioning with Control Signal Terminals  Factory Setting               52  ERROR AND WARNING MESSAGES                          PEEL MT TIE 56    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive     04020003                 2013 www eaton com iii    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    Table of Contents  continued    PARAMETERS  Control UTE                              tt cob ne douze e e          Se b ech clad 60  Parameter Men    PAR   iu               We                      uma pag qued 64  Operational Data Indicator  MON                                      127  Setpoint Input        4 aut                        UP NES 129  SERIAL INTERFACE  MODBUS          General Information About Modbus                                   131  Communications in a Modbus Network                                131  Modbus Parameters  di                        
68.  System  PDS  xs ain edunt         OE neam RC RR eed  eR RECESSU 18  AC Power Networks with Grounded Center Point  TN  TT Networks                19  EMC Environment and Category                                            22  Parallel Connection of Several Motors to One Frequency Inverter                  23  Example of a Motor Ratings Plate                                           24  Starand Delta Circuit Iypes       ies ee eene b RD UI eb ao exa i m need 24  ViEIz CharacteriStic CUrVe    x eo            SW             RE tbs EAS            24  Bypass  Motor Control   Exarnpl       us          c ome deed outs      RC Quee d      25  Mounting PositIortEST ES3  aus            ea              panied sodden Y RO           PRETI 26  Mounting Position  ESA  and  FSB    sss iacit eese tenere dps eden ne b dones 26  Air Goolitig  Space zx scr x E Ue estu            NOE X RR 27  Minimum  Clearance atthe Eront        cuta bee ones           UR he RAD 27  Air Baffle Due to Increased Circulation with Device Fan                          27  Mounting DIMENSIONS Se vi  acad bet oe                         clare 28  Configuration for Mounting with Screws                                  5   28  Mounting Rail Conforming with IEC EN 60715                                 29  Fastening to the Mounting                                                     29                  uso onte zc                                                             29  Mounting the Cable Routing Plate and the Bracke
69.  V     96   96     11 3                                                                                                                                                                               P11 5  P11 6  P11 6     P11 6            P6 3 P11 2 Hz P6 3 P11 2 Hz P11 4 P11 2 Hz  Characteristic Curve  V Hz  P11 1  Linear Squared Configurable  P11 1 0 P11 1 1 P11 1 2  V Hz Characteristic Curve  continued  Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P11 2 602 X     Cut off frequency 60 00  30 320 Hz The output voltage reaches its maximum rated value P11 3 with  the cut off frequency  For example  400V at 50 Hz  If the maximum output frequency  P6 4  is set to higher values   the output voltage remains constant as of the cut off frequency  defined here  As of this cut off frequency  the voltage frequency ratio is no  longer constant  The magnetization of the connected motor is  reduced with increasing frequency  field weakening range   Example  Linear V Hz Characteristic Curve with Cut Off  Frequency and Field Weakening Range  V   96     11 3    11 6  P6 3 P11 2 P6 4 Hz  P11 3 603 X    Output voltage 100 00  10 20096 Input voltage  In the standard application  the value set here is equal to 10096  of the input voltage supply and corresponding with the nominal  motor voltage set under P7 5  see the motor ratings plate   108 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    V Hz Characteristic Curve  continued    Access  P
70.  activates access to all parameters and the full  functionality of all buttons of the keypad  free parameter  definition  see B in the figure on Page 64      This exits the quick configuration and the guided setup with  the quick start assistant     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    MN04020003E    October 2013  www eaton com    Parameters    65    Parameters    Quick Start Parameter Guide    The following table shows the preset application parameters of parameter P1 2  in the factory setting     With P1 1 2 1 you are guided through the drive parameters in steps  Quickstart Wizard  after the power  supply is switched on and after the factory settings are activated     Note  To cancel Quickstart Wizard  or to set parameter not contained in the Quickstart Wizard  set parameter P1 1   0     Predefined Application Parameters from Parameter P1 2    0           For detailed explanation of parameters and their options  see the detailed parameters list starting on Page 67                                                              Parameter Basic   PNU   Standard Drive  Pump Drive Fan Drive High Load Designation  P1 1 1   Only quick 1   Only quick 1   Only quick 1   Only quick Quick start parameters  configuration configuration configuration configuration  parameters parameters parameters parameters  P1 2 0   Basic 1   Pump drive 2   Fan drive 3   Hoisting device Application   high load   P1 3 1 NA 1 NA 1 NA 1 2 N A Country specific default  settings  P6 1 1   Control signal
71.  analog  parameterizable          2 x 0  2  to  10 Vdc  Rj  gt 200k ohms or 0  4  to 20             200 ohms  selection via microswitches  Resolution        Bit 10       Output  digital  parameter definable    1 xtransistor  48 Vdc  max  50 mA             Output relay  parameter definable    1 x N 0  250 Vac  maximum 2A or 250 Vdc  max  0 4A       Output relay  parameter definable    1 x changeover contact  250 Vac  maximum 2A or 250 Vdc  maximum 0 4A       Serial interface       RS485 Modbus   RTU       Notes       Symbols used in technical data and formulas     G 122  F  50  C  with lateral clearance of  0 79 in  20 mm  and reduced pulse frequency x 4 kHz and altitude x 1000m     10 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com              Series Overview    Power Connection Voltages                                                                                                          Overload  Rated Current  Current  150   Assigned Motor Rating  P P   le le150  230V  50 Hz   230V  60 Hz   Part Number  A   A   kW   A  o  hp   A  o Frame Size  1 AC 115V  50 60 Hz   94 132V  gt 0   45 66 Hz  gt 0    MMX11AA1D7   1 7 2 6 0 25 14  4   15   FS2  MMX11AA2D4_ 24 3 6 0 37 2  2 2 2 FS2  MMX11AA2DB8   2 8 42 0 55 2 7 3 4 2 2 FS2  MMX11AA3D7_ 3 7 5 6 0 75 3 2 3 2 FS2  MMX11AA4D8_ 4 8 7 2 1 1 4 6  1 2 4 2 FS3  1 AC 230V  50 60 Hz   177 264V  0   45 66 Hz  0    MMX12AA1D7_ 1 7 2 6 0 25 1 4  4   15   FS1  MMX12AA2D4_ 24 3 6 0 37 2  2 2 2 FS1        1
72.  and the utilization category  AC 1  IEC 60947   Input contactors and the assignment to  M Max frequency inverters are explained in the appendix     While planning the project  make sure that inching operation  is not done via the input contactor of the frequency inverter  on frequency controlled drives  but through a controller input  of the frequency inverter     The maximum permitted operating frequency of the input  voltage with the M Max frequency inverter is one time per  minute  normal operation      EMC Measures    Electrical components in a system  machine  have a  reciprocal effect on each other  Each device not only emits  interference but is also affected by it  The interference can  be produced by galvanic  capacitive  and or inductive  Sources  or by electromagnetic radiation  In practice  the limit  between line conducted interference and emitted  interference is around 30 MHz  Above 30 MHz  cables and  conductors act like antennas that radiate electromagnetic  waves     EMC Environment and Category    Public Medium Voltage Supply Grid    Public  Measuring  b Low Voltage  Point Supply Grid           Category C1 C2    Category   3   4    1  Enviroment 2  Enviroment       Electromagnetic compatibility  EMC  for frequency controlled  drives  variable speed drives  is implemented in accordance  with product standard IEC EN 61800 3  This includes the  complete power drive system  PDS   from the input supply to  the motor  including all components  as well as cables 
73.  at Start                                           After the time set has elapsed  the frequency inverter  starts automatically with the acceleration time set at  P6 5  The speed of the motor  2  follows the  characteristic of the output frequency  3        112 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Braking  continued    Parameters       Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P12 3 515 X     DC braking  start frequency 1 50       0 00 10 00 Hz    The output frequency  fog  set here automatically activates the  DC braking after a stop command  FWD REV switched off     Requirement  P6 8   1  Stop function ramp     The output frequency  1  is reduced after the stop command  according to the deceleration time set at P6 6  Depending on  inertia and the load torque  the speed of the motor  2  is  reduced accordingly and braked with DC current at the  frequency value set here    You can set the duration of the DC braking  3  under P12 4       Start Frequency During Relay Ramp    fA       1 P6 8  1                               P12 3                                  M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 113    Parameters    Braking  continued       Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P12 4 508 X    DC braking  braking time at STOP 0 00       0 00 600 00s    Duration of DC braking after the stop command    With P6 8   1  Stop function ramp
74.  characteristic curve  2PS  0   See  P11 1  on Page 107           Linear       Squared       Configurable       P14 12    1354    Torque increase  2PS  0       Deactivated       Enabled    Automatic increase of the output voltage  Boost  with an  increased load and low speed  for example  heavy starting duty     A Caution  A high torque at low speed leads to a high thermal  load on the motor    Note  If temperatures are too high  the motor should be fitted  with a fan       P14 13    1353    Motor temperature protection  2PS  2       The motor temperature protection is designed to protect the  motor from overheating  It is based on a temperature algorithm  and uses the motor current  P14 1  to determine the motor load   see  Motor Heat Protection  P8 6 P8 9   on Page 92        Deactivated       Alarm  AL16        Fault  F    16   stop function according to P6 8       P14 14    1469    Motor ambient temperature  2PS  40        20   to 100  C       P14 15    1470    Motor cooling factor at zero frequency  2PS  40 0       0 0 15096    The cooling factor of the motor at zero frequency defines the  ratio for cooling the motor at the rated frequency with the rated  operational current without an external fan  see figure on   Page 88        P14 16    1471    Motor thermal time constant  2PS  45       1 200 min    The temperature time constant determines the time span in  which the heat calculation model achieves 6396 of its end value   It depends on the design of the motor and is di
75.  eaton com    Appendix                                                                         Device Series MMX12  MMX12AA   F0 0 Symbols    Unit 1D7 204 208 307 408 700 906  Rated operational current le A 17 24 2 8 3 7 4 8 7 9 6  Overload current for 60s every       2 6 3 6 42 5 6 72 10 4 144  6005      122      50       Starting current for 2s every 20s       34 4 8 5 6 74 9 6 14 19 2  at 122  F  50  C   Apparent power at rated 230V 5 kVA 0 68 0 96 1 12 1 47 1 81 2 79 3 82  operation 240V S  KVA 0 71 0 99 1 16 1 54 1 99 2 91 3 99  Assigned motor rating 230V P kW 0 25 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 22  HP 1 4 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 2 2 3   Power side  primary side    Number of phases Single phase or two phase   Rated voltage UIN V 208V  15    240    10   50 60 Hz    177   264V  0   45 66 Hz  0     Input current         42 5 7 6 6 8 3 112 141 15 8  Maximum leakage current to  ground  PE  without motor   MMX12   N IPE mA   MMX12   F_ IPE mA 15 4 11 8 24 4  Braking torque   Default M MN    30   DC braking Wp    100  adjustable  Pulse frequency fPWM kHz 6  adjustable 1   16   Heat dissipation at rated Py W 17 9 24 6 292 40 2 49 6 66 8 78 1  operational current  lo   Efficiency h 0 93 0 93 0 95 0 95 0 95 0 96 0 96  Fan  device internal  V V V V V       4  temperature controlled   Installation size FS1 FS1 FS1 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS3  Weight m Lbs  kg  1 2 0 55   1 2 055  1 2 0 55  1 5 07  15 07  1 5 07  2 20 99   Notes       Symbols used in technical data and formulas      Guide value  calculated   no s
76.  from dec1  P6 6   to dec2  P6 20        P6 23    1429    REV blocked 0  The rotating field reversal of the output frequency is blocked          Deactivated       Activated       86    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Parameters    Drives Control  continued                                           Access Factory Setting   PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3    P6 24 509 X     Skip frequency 1  lower value 0 00  0 00 P6 25 Hz       P6 25 510 X     Skip frequency 1  upper value 0 00  P6 24 P6 4 2 3        26 511       Skip frequency 2  lower value 0 00  0 00 P6 27 Hz       P6 27 512 X    Skip frequency 2  upper value 0 00  P6 26 P6 4 Hz       P6 28 513 X     Skip frequency 3  lower value 0 00  0 00 P6 29 Hz       P6 29 514 X     Skip frequency 3  upper value 0 00  P6 28 P6 4 Hz           Setting Range for Skip Frequencies             P6 30 759 X     Automatic REAF attempts 3    1 10 Define the permissible number of automatic restarts   REAF   Restart After Failure     P6 31 1481 X     Manual mode  primary control source 1             Like P6 1 Assignment of the control levels  Manual mode is activated via parameter P3 37       P6 32 1482 X     Manual mode  primary speed reference 3       Like P6 2 Assignment of setpoint sources  Manual mode is activated via parameter P3 37  P6 33 1483 X     Manual mode  KEYPAD lock 1    The Start Stop functions are blocked in Manual mode via the  keypad    0 Deactivated  1 Enabled        
77.  insulation according to the specified  input voltages for the permanent installation  A shielded  cable is not required on the input side     A completely  360    shielded low impedance cable is  required on the motor side  The length of the motor cable  depends on the RFI class and must not exceed 98 ft  30m   for the M Max     Engineering    Residual Current Device  RCD     RCD  Residual Current Device   Residual current device   residual current circuit breaker  FI circuit breaker      Residual current circuit breakers protect persons and animals  from the existence  not the origination  of impermissibly high  contact voltages  They prevent dangerous  and in some  cases deadly injuries caused by electrical accidents  and also  serve as fire prevention     A WARNING    With frequency inverters  only AC DC sensitive residual  current circuit breakers  RCD type B  are to be used   EN 50178  IEC 755      Identification on the Residual Current Circuit Breakers  AC DC sensitive           RCD  type B    Frequency inverters work internally with rectified AC  currents  If an error occurs  the DC currents can block a type  A RCD circuit breaker from triggering and therefore disable  the protective functionality        CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram           Residual current circuit breakers  RCD  are only to be  installed between the AC power supply network and the  frequency inverter     Safety relevant leakage currents can occur while 
78.  is  2051  dec  as the master PLC has an offset of  1   0001 Content  2 bytes  for register 42051   0000 0000 0000 0001  bin    EBAA CRC       Slave response  01 86 02       1  hex                 hex Name   01 Slave address   86 Function code  here  Write a holding register   MSB was set to 1   02 Error code  Stated address not found    C3A1 CRC       No Slave Response    In the following cases  the frequency inverter ignores the  request and does not send a reply        On receiving a broadcast request   e  f the request contains a transmission error       f the slave address in the request does not match that of  the frequency inverter    e With an invalid data length    for example  reading of 12 registers  error message F08 is  triggered in the MMX    e With a CRC or parity error  With a CRC error the value of system parameter S2 1 is  increased by 1  xx   number of faulty messages     If the time interval between the messages is less than  3 5  characters    The master must be programmed to repeat the request if it  does not receive a response within a specified time     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 135    Serial Interface  Modbus RTU     Data Storage with Modbus  The information is stored in one input and one holding register        Register Numbers Type Name  30001   39999 Read only  ro   read only  Input register  40001   49999 Read write  rw   Read write  Holding register       The registers are the memory location
79.  of the data  The memory size of each register is  1 word     Modbus Register Mapping    The register mapping enables the processing in MMX of the content listed in the following  table via Modbus RTU                 Group Register Numbers ID Range Assignment of the ID Numbers   Display values 40001   40098  30001 30098  1   98 Parameter list   see  Appendix A  starting on  Page 142    Failure code 40099  30099  99 Error list   see  Error and Warning Messages  starting  on Page 56    Parameters 40101 40999  30101   30999  101   1999 Parameter list   see  Appendix A  starting on  Page 142    Input process data 42001   42099  32001 32099  2001   2099  See Page 137    Output process data 42101 42199  32101   32199  2101   2199  See Page 138           Each content in this table is assigned an ID number  abbreviation of the register numbers    This ID number is used in M Max for the communication with Modbus RTU        Example  Control word  ID 2001        ID Register Numbers  Value 2001 32001 42001  Application Communication of Modbus RTU Memory location of the data       With some PLC manufacturers  the interface driver for Modbus RTU communication may  contain an offset of  1  the ID to be used would then be 2000 instead of 2001      When processing values  the comma is not included  for example  the motor current  ID 2106   in the display of the MMX is shown as 0 35 A but is transferred via Modbus as 0023  hex    0035  dec       136 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04
80.  or  L1  L2 N and L3  MMX32  MMX34   the frequency inverter  automatically runs the following functions       The lighting of the LCD display is switched on and all  segments are actuated briefly    e After the self test  the top status line of the LCD display  indicates that the device is ready to start and proper  operation by an arrow A under READY  The arrow under  STOP indicates that there is no start command  FWD or  REV     e The arrow    in the bottom status line shows the actuation  via control signal terminals with the factory setting on I O  Control  Control Input Output   The arrow over FWD   Forward  indicates the basic rotational direction  phase  sequence for a clockwise rotating field  on the output  terminals U T1  V T2 and W T3        Display for the operating data M1 1 and 0 00 Hz  output  frequency  in automatic alternating sequence  The arrow     in the left hand status line indicates menu level MON   Monitor 2 Operating data display     Operational Data Indicator  Operational     READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT    COR DRE SUM         o M I      PAR  11          FET          FWD REV TO KEYPAD BUS    Y    Display in Automatic Alternation         READY RUN        ALARM FAULT                 21        PAR  LI  Lio    FLT Hz         FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS       By actuating the OK button  you can set the  alternating display mode to stay on the output  frequency  0 00 Hz                  The frequency inverter is ready for operation and can be  started via the co
81.  power  reduction per 328 ft  100m   maximum 6562 ft  2000m   at maximum 122  F   50      ambient temperature   Mounting position m     Vertical  90 for F51   FS3  Vertical  30 for FS4 and FS5   Protection type         IP20 for FS1 FS3  IP21 NEMA for FS4 and FS5   Busbar tag shroud         BGV       VBG4  finger  and back of hand safe    Mechanical shock resistance              68 2 27    Storage and transport  15g  11 ms       the packaging   UPS drop test  for applicable UPS weights     Vibration       EN 60068 2 6  3 150 Hz  oscillation amplitude 1 mm  peak  at 3 15 8 Hz   maximum acceleration amplitude 1g at 15 8   150 Hz                Emitted interference with internal EMC filter        C2  Class A in 1st environment  residential area with commercial utilization    maximum motor cable length  C3  Class A in 2nd environment  industrial               0 0         No EMC filter  MMX    F0 0         C2 in first environment max  3m motor cable length    51     53    15m  FS4 and FS5        in second environment max  30m motor cable length    51     53    50m  FS4 and FS5           Notes     Symbols used in technical data and formulas      122  F  50  C  with lateral clearance of 20 79 in  20 mm  and reduced pulse frequency  4 kHz and altitude  1000m     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 9    M Max Series Overview    General Rated Operational Data  continued                                                                          
82.  pulse   P3 3  Stop pulse   Start and stop command via the control signal  P3 2   Start    P3 3   Stop  by a momentary pulse   24V    see Example B on Page 76   3 P3 2  FWD   P3 3  REV   P3 2  control signal terminal 8  starts the drive with a clockwise  rotating field  FWD  and P3 3  control signal terminal 9  with an  anticlockwise rotating field  REV   Both control commands are  interlocked  exclusive OR   P3 2 403 V     Start signal Start FWD  1  1  0 Deactivated  1 Activated via control signal terminal 8  DI1   2 Activated via control signal terminal 9  DI2   3 Activated via control signal terminal 10  DI3   4 Activated via control signal terminal 14  DIA   5 Activated via control signal terminal 15  015   6 Activated via control signal terminal 16  016   P3 3 404          STOP signal Start REV 1  2  Like P3 2 Allocation of the function to control signal terminals  P3 4 412         Reverse  changes the direction of the field of rotation from 0  FWD to REV   Like P3 2 Allocation of the function to control signal terminals       5 405 V     Ext  fault close  N O  0  Like 3 2 Allocation of the function to control signal terminals    Error message when applying  24V to the assigned control  signal terminal  DI1 to DI6        72 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com                         lt     Digital Inputs  continued          Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P3 6 406 V     Ext  fault open  N C  
83.  ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P6 13 731 X rw REAF  automatic restart after an 0   Deactivated 85 0  error message 1   Activated  P6 14 600 X rw Stop on direction change via the 0   Deactivated 85 1  arrow buttons   lt   gt   of the keypad 1  Activated   KEYPAD   P6 15 84 X rw Keypad frequency reference  REF     P6 4      P6 4 Hz 86 0 00  P6 16 474 X rw Stop button active 0   Deactivated  no  86 1  1   Activated  yes   P6 17 427 X rw Secondary remote control source 1 Control signal terminals  1 0  86 3  2   Control unit  KEYPAD   3   Fieldbus  BUS   P6 18 428 X rw Secondary remote speed reference 0   Fixed frequency          86 2  1   Operating unit  REF   2   Fieldbus  BUS   3 All  4 Al2  5   Motor potentiometer  P6 19 502 X rw Secondary acceleration time 0 1 3000s 86 10 0   acc2   P6 20 503 X rw Secondary deceleration time 0 1 3000s 86 10 0   dec2   P6 21 526 X rw Acceleration transition frequency 0 00   P6 4 Hz 86 0 00         1       2   P6 22 1334 X rw Deceleration transition frequency 0 00   P6 4 Hz 86 0 00   dec1   dec2   P6 23 1429    rw REV blocked 0   Deactivated 86 0  1   Activated  P6 24 509 X rw Skip frequency 1  lower value 0 00   P6 25 87 0 00  P6 25 510 X rw Skip frequency 1  upper value P6 24   P6 4 Hz 87 0 00  P6 26 511 X rw Skip frequency 2  lower value 0 00   P6 27 87 0 00  P6 27 731 X rw Skip frequency 2  upper value P6 26   P6 4 Hz 87 0 00  P6 28 513 X rw Skip frequency 3  lower value 0 00   P6 29 87 0 00  P6 29 514 X rw Skip frequen
84.  running  motors will not exceed the rated output current of the  requency inverter        Switching in the output of the frequency inverter is only  permitted with V Hz characteristic curve control     The speed control with slip compensation  P11 8  increases  the drive dynamics and optimizes the output  For this the  frequency inverter processes all motor data in an electrical  image        The speed control operating mode  P11 8  must only be used  with single drives  one motor at the output of the frequency  inverter   The rated current of the motor must be assigned to  the rated operational current of the frequency inverter  same  rating      M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 15              Series Overview    Proper Use    The M Max frequency inverters are not domestic appliances   They are designed only for industrial use as system  components     The M Max frequency inverters are electrical apparatus for  controlling variable speed drives with three phase motors   They are designed for installation in machines or for use in  combination with other components within a machine or  system     After installation in a machine  the frequency inverters must  not be taken into operation until the associated machine has  been confirmed to comply with the safety requirements of  Machinery Safety Directive  MSD  89 392 EEC  meets the  requirements of EN 60204   The user of the equipment is  responsible for ensuring that the machine
85.  see  figure on Page 18   This type of drive system can consist of  several individual drives     The generic standards of the individual components in a PDS  compliant with IEC EN 61800 3 do not apply  These  component manufacturers  however  must offer solutions  that ensure standards compliant use     In Europe  maintaining the EMC guidelines is mandatory     A declaration of conformity  CE  always refers to a  typical   power drive system  PDS   The responsibility to comply with  the legally stipulated limit values and thus the provision of  electromagnetic compatibility is ultimately the responsibility  of the end user or system operator  This operator must also  take measures to minimize or remove emission in the  environment concerned  see figure below   He must also use  means to increase the interference immunity of the devices  of the system     With their high interference immunity up to category C3   M Max frequency inverters are ideal for use in harsh  industrial networks  2nd environment      With line conducted emission  type MMX    F frequency  inverters  with integrated interference suppression filter   ensure the observance of the sensitive limit values of  category C2 in environment 1  This requires an  EMC compliant installation  see Page 32  and the  observance of the permissible motor cable lengths and  maximum switching frequency  fpyypy  of the inverter     Type MMX    N  frequency inverters can comply with the  limit values of category C1 in environme
86.  speed of the motor  RPM       M1 4 3 Motor current 0 00 A Measured motor current     1 5 4 Motor torque 0 0 96 Calculated ratio of torque to rated torque of the  motor      M1 6 5 Motor power 0 0 96 Calculated ratio of actual output power to rated  motor output      M1 7 6 Motor voltage 0 0 V Measured output voltage to motor   M1 8 7 DC bus voltage 000 V Measured intermediate circuit voltage   depending on the supply voltage    M1 9 8 Unit temperature 00   F    C  Measured heat sink temperature   M1 10 9 Motor temperature 0 96 96  calculated value         1 11 13 Analog input 1 0 0 96 Value      Al1   M1 12 14 Analog input 2 0 0 96 Value on AI2   M1 13 26 Analog output 1 0 0 96 Value on AO1   M1 14 15 Digital input 0     Status 011  DI2  DI3  see  Example of Status    Displays  on Page 128        Notes       The calculated motor data  M1 3  M1 5 and M1 6  is based on the values entered in parameter group P7   see  Motor  P7   on Page 88     G The calculated motor temperature  M1 10  considers the temperature model of the protection function in parameter group P8   see  Protective Functions  P8   on Page 90      M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 127    Parameters    Operational Data Indicator  continued                         Display   PNU ID Designation Value Unit Description   M1 15 16 Digital input 0   Status DIA  DI5  DI6  see  Example of Status  Displays  on Page 128    M1 16 17 Digital output 1     Status RO1  RO2  DO  see
87.  stop  STOP   P12 6 1447 X     Brake chopper  DC bus switching threshold 765   0 870V This function is only active with the three phase frequency    inverters MMX34   3D3_  3 3A  to MMX34   014_  14A     The switching threshold for the brake transistor should always  be above the maximum DC link voltage    For example  allowing for the maximum permissible input  voltage peak of 10      ULN   400 Vac  ULN  10    400 Vac   440 Vac    Upc   1 35 x U  Nmax   1 35 x 440V   594 Vdc  maximum  permissible DC link voltage in motor operation     Allowing for an energy absorption from the DC link of around  3096 during braking  the on threshold here for the braking  transistor should be set to around 780V    Note  Lower values for the on threshold will switch on the  braking resistor earlier so that it is subject to a greater load    The DC link voltage is shown at M1 8  In practice  the value of  the DC link voltage is around 565V at    y   400V       116 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Mechanical Brake  Actuation    The actuation of an external mechanical brake can be  implemented via one of the digital outputs  see  Digital  Outputs  P5   on Page 78   if the value 26    External brake  actuated  is assigned     e Transistor output DO  control signal terminal 20  DO     supply voltage control signal terminal 13  DO    maximum  48 Vdc 50 mA  Parameter 5 3    e Relay RO1       contact control signal terminal 22  R13   and 23  R14   max
88.  supply  voltage source  PES      30 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    EMC Compliant Setup  Example  M Max                                                                             W2 U2 V2  U1V1 W1                                                                                                                                           24 Vdc 24 Vdc 4  115 120         115 120         230 240         230 240           400        400 Vac  211 81      460 480        460 480          2 300       575        575           Notes      Power cable  L1  L2 N  L3 and U T1  V T2  W T3  R   R       Control and signal lines  1 to 26  A  B  fieldbus connection   Large area connection of all metallic control panel components    Mounting surfaces of frequency inverter and cable shielding must be free from paint    Connect the cable shielding in the output of the frequency inverter with a large surface area contact to the ground potential  PES    Large area cable shield contacts with motor    Large area earth connection of all metallic parts     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com       Installation                            31    Installation    Electrical Installation       WARNING    Carry out wiring work only after the frequency inverter  has been correctly mounted and secured     A WARNING    Electric shock hazard   risk of injuries     Carry out wiring work only if the unit is de energized   
89.  switched off  intermediate  circuit capacitor discharging time      Pay attention to hazard warnings             DANGER    5 MIN    A WARNING    Discharge yourself on a grounded surface before  touching the control signal terminals and the controller  PCB  This protects the device from destruction by  electrostatic discharge     A WARNING    On the control signal and the connection terminals of the  frequency inverter  no leakage resistance tests are to be  performed with an insulation tester     A WARNING    Wait at least 5 minutes after switching the supply  voltage off before you disconnect a connection on the  connection terminals  L1  L2 N  L3  U T1  V T2  W T3   R   R   of the frequency inverter          WARNING    Commissioning is only to be completed by qualified  technicians     A WARNING    Hazardous voltage     The safety instructions on Page x must be followed     A WARNING    The components in the frequency inverter s power  section are energized if the supply voltage  line voltage   is connected  For instance  power terminals L1  L2 N  L3   R   R   U T1  V T2  W T3     The control signal terminals are isolated from the line  power potential     There can be a dangerous voltage on the relay terminals   22 to 26  even if the frequency inverter is not being  supplied with line voltage  for example  integration of  relay contacts in control systems with 230 Vac      A WARNING    Following a shutdown  fault  line voltage off   the motor  can start automatically  whe
90.  the arrow buttons   lt   gt   of the 1   keypad  KEYPAD    0 Deactivated  changes the direction of rotation  FWD         REV     automatically on passing setpoint zero       1 Activated  stops the drive at setpoint zero and requires  another actuation of the Start button       Automatic Restart After Error Message                                            Two Start Attempts  Item  Number Description  P6 10 P6 10 P6 10           gt               1 First automatic restart    1              2 Second automatic restart                 3 Shut off when error detected          TEST   monitored test tim               FAULT   shut off when error message occurs      1                      1            4 Motor stop signal  b  ew due                  RESET   reset error message  FAULT                               M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 85    Parameters    Drives Control  continued    PNU    ID    Access  RUN Value Range    Factory Setting  Description  P1 3        P6 15    184    wv 2 3    Keypad frequency reference  REF  0 00          P6 4 P6 4 Hz    The setpoint value  REF  defined here can be activated at  parameter P6 2 and via the keypad  LOC REM     In KEYPAD mode  the value can be changed with the arrow  buttons  The changes are written back automatically to this  parameter  P6 15        P6 16    1474    Stop button active 1    In the default settings  the STOP button of the keypad is  active in all operating modes       
91.  the control  signal terminals 8  DI1  and 9  DI2  to be simulated     Parameter P3 4      enables the rotation reversal  FWD  lt   gt   REV  to be activated  reversing starter  via control signal  terminal 10  DI3      Set P3 9   0     76 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Analog Outputs  P4     An analog voltage signal from 0 10   is output at control  signal terminal 18  The maximum permissible load is 10 mA   Reference potential is GND on control signal terminals 3  and 5     In the factory setting  the voltage signal  0 10    is  proportional to the output frequency f Out   0 fmax  P6 4      The output signal is not monitored by the frequency inverter     Analog Outputs    Parameters    Analog Output AO                                           Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P4 1 307         AO signal  Analog Output  1  0 Deactivated  1 Output frequency f Out   0 f max  P6 4   2 Output current 19   O IN Motor  P7 1   3 Torque My   0 100   calculated value   4 PID controller  output  0 100    P4 2 310 V     AO  minimum value 1  0 oV  1 2V  live zero   P4 3 1456          AO  gain 100 00  0 00 200 00  Gain factor  The maximum value set here always corresponds to the  maximum output voltage 10V  P4 4 1477          AO  filter time 0 10       0 00 10 00s    Filter time constant for the analog output voltage    See  Filter Time Constant  on Page 70       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive 
92.  the fault menu  The value listed is the subcode   GO Power software    V018 IGBT overtemperature  Power software  V019 heat sink overtemperature     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 57    Error and Warning Messages    List of Fault Messages  F  and Warning Messages  AL   continued    Display Designation    50 Live zero error   analog input     Possible Cause    Monitored zero point  Current less than 4 m    Signal cable interrupted  The signal source is faulty    A  voltage less than 2V    Instructions    Check the analog setpoint circuit and current and voltage  source  see parameter P2 1  P2 5  P8 1  P8 10                    51 External fault Error message at a digital input  011   016   Check the programming  P3 5  P3 6  and check the device  programmed as input for an external error indicated by the error message  message Check the cabling for the respective device as well  53 Fieldbus error The communication link between the master Check the installation  device and the drive s fieldbus has been Further notes are provided in the manual of the optiona  interrupted fieldbus interface  CANopen  PROFIBUS DP  and so on   If the installation is okay  contact your local representative  54 Fieldbus interface MMX NET XA mounting frame for fieldbus Error message with activated fieldbus connection of the  error interface cards is not connected to the frequency interface between the frequency inverter and the mounting       inverter  
93.  the input supply network  and from connection terminals L1  L2 N and L3 of the  frequency inverter  Measure the insulation resistance of the  input cable between the individual phase conductors and  between each phase conductor and the protective  conductor     The insulation resistance must be greater than 1M ohm     Testing the Motor Insulation   Disconnect the motor cable from the motor  U  V  W  and  open the bridge circuits  star or delta  in the motor terminal  box  Measure the insulation resistance of the individual  motor windings  The measurement voltage must at least  match the rated voltage of the motor but is not to exceed  1000V     The insulation resistance must be greater than 1M ohm     Consider the information from the motor manufacturer in  testing the insulation resistance     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 49    Operation    Operation    Commissioning Checklist  Before placing the frequency converter into operation  make sure to check the following     No  Activity Completed Notes          1 Installation and wiring have been carried out in accordance  with the corresponding instructional leaflet  AWA8230 2416                             2 All wiring and line section leftovers  as well as all the tools  used  have been removed from the frequency inverter s  proximity   3 All terminals in the power section and in the control section    were tightened with the specified torque             4 The lines connecte
94.  the right solution for the application     But  decision makers demand more than just innovative products     They turn to Eaton for an unwavering commitment to personal  support that makes customer success a top priority  For more  information  visit www eaton com electrical     Eaton   1000 Eaton Boulevard  Cleveland  OH 44122  United States  Eaton com       2013 Eaton   All Rights Reserved   Printed in USA   Publication No  MN04020003E   Z14306  October 2013    Eaton is a registered trademark     All other trademarks are property  of their respective owners     
95.  to the rated motor current     Selection Criteria                                              230 400   A Y 4 0 2 3A  0 75 kW          0 67  1410 min 1 50 Hz                                                                  When selecting the drive  the following criteria must be  known     e Type of motor  three phase asynchronous motor        nput voltage   rated operating voltage of the motor   for example  3      400       e Rated motor current  guide value  dependent on the circuit  type and the supply voltage     e Load torque  quadratic  constant   e Starting torque  e Ambient temperature  rated value 122 F  bO C      M Max Series Overview    When connecting multiple motors in parallel to the output of  a frequency inverter  the motor currents are added  geometrically   separated by effective and idle current  components  When you select a frequency inverter  make  sure that it can supply the total resulting current  If  necessary  for dampening and compensating the deviating  current values  motor reactors or sinusoidal filters must be  connected between the frequency inverter and the motor     The parallel connection of multiple motors in the output of  he frequency inverter is only permitted with V Hz   characteristic curve control     If you connect a motor to an operational frequency inverter   he motor draws a multiple of its rated operational current   When you select a frequency inverter  make sure that the  starting current plus the sum of the currents of the
96.  torque of  around 3096 of the motor rated torque  A higher braking  torque can be achieved by selecting a more powerful  frequency inverter  From the 1 1 kW  3 3A at 400V    MMX34AA3D3_  rating  the internal brake chopper with an  external power resistor enables up to 10096 of the rated  motor torque        Regenerative Braking with External Braking Resistor  nz  qo                               R  Rg    IG fe       gt  3  1                                Description  1 Machine flywheel mass  2 Inverter with brake chopper  brake transistor   3 Brake resistor  RB     See Energy Flow  brake torque        M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Parameters    The brake chopper can be activated at parameter P12 5  This  function is only activated with the three phase frequency  inverters MMX34   3D3_  3 3A  to MMX34   014_  14      These ratings have an internal brake transistor that can  dissipate excess brake energy via an external power resistor   connection terminals R  and R   when large flywheel  masses or short deceleration times are involved        This parameter is not visible with frequency inverters without  a braking transistor     115    Parameters    Braking  continued                      Access Factory Setting   PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P12 5 504 X                              0   0 Brake chopper deactivated   1 Automatic activation in operation  RUN    2 Automatic activation in operation  RUN  and upon
97.  use complies with  the relevant EU Directives     The CE markings on the M MAX frequency inverter confirm  that  when used      a typical drive configuration  the apparatus  complies with the European Low Voltage Directive  LVD  and  the EMC Directives  Directive 73 23 EEC  as amended by  93 68 EEC and Directive 89 336 EEC  as amended by  93 68 EEC      Maintenance and Inspection   Provided that the general rating data  see  Nameplate Rating  Data  on Page 6  and the special technical data  see  Special  Technical Data  on Page 142  of the ratings concerned are  observed  the M Max frequency inverters are maintenance  free  However  external influences may affect the function  and the lifespan of the M Max frequency inverter  We  therefore recommend that the devices are checked regularly  and the following maintenance measures are carried out at  the specified intervals     Maintenance Measures and Intervals  Maintenance Measure    In the described system configurations  M Max frequency  inverters are suitable for use in public and non public  networks     A connection to IT networks  networks without reference to  earth potential  is permissible only to a limited extent   because the device s built in filter capacitors connect the  network with the earth potential  enclosure   On earth free  networks  this can lead to dangerous situations or damage to  the device  isolation monitoring required      To the output of the frequency inverter  terminals U  V  W   you must not   
98. 0  Like P3 2 Allocation of the function to control signal terminals    Error message when switching off or interrupting   wire breakage safe  the applied control voltage   24V  from  the assigned control signal terminal  DI1 to DI6     P3 7 414        Fault reset 5          Like P3 2 Allocation of the function to control signal terminals    Acknowledges a displayed error message  Reset  when  switching on  24V on the assigned control signal terminal   DI1 to DI6     P3 8 407        Run enable 0          Like P3 2 Allocation of the function to control signal terminals    Rotational direction independent start release when switching  on  24V on the assigned control signal terminal  011 to DI6     P3 9 419 V     Fixed frequency  binary value BO 3          Like P3 2 Allocation of the function to control signal terminals  per table below    P3 10 420 V     Fixed frequency  binary value B1 4          Like P3 2 Allocation of the function to control signal terminals  per table below    P3 11 421 V     Fixed frequency  binary value B2 0          Like P3 2 Allocation of the function to control signal terminals  per table below       The binary connection of three digital inputs enable calling seven fixed  frequencies  eight fixed frequencies if parameter P6 2   015 set     The limitation of the fixed frequencies is done based on parameters  P6 3  minimum frequency  and P6 4  maximum frequency     The switch between the individual fixed frequencies is done with the  acceleration time an
99. 0003E   October 2013 www eaton com 99    Parameters    Fixed Frequency Setpoint Value  P10     Fixed frequencies have a higher priority than frequency  reference values  They can be called individually  binary  coded  or via the digital inputs DI1 to DI6 or via the  sequencing control program     The maximum permitted set value for a fixed frequency is  limited by parameter P6 4  maximum frequency      A fixed frequency value can go below a minimum limit  frequency set at parameter P6 3     The fixed frequency values can be changed during operation   RUN      Fixed Frequency    You can set eight different fixed frequency setpoints  FFO to  FF7  in the P10 parameter group     Fixed Frequencies FF1  FF2 and FF3    FF1   FF2              DI1 DI2        DI4    The fixed frequencies FF1 2 10 Hz  FF2 2 15 Hz and   FF3   20 Hz can be called via digital inputs DI3  control signal  terminal 10  and DIA  control signal terminal 14  in the factory  setting     Fixed Frequency                                  Input  Binary  Fixed Frequency  BO B1 B2  Factory setting  FFO  P10 1   5 Hz  only if P6 2   0      FF1  P10 2   10 Hz    X   FF2  P10 3   15 Hz  X X             P10 4   20 Hz       X FF4  P10 5   25 Hz  X   X FF5  P10 6   30 Hz    X FF6  P10 7   40 Hz  X X FF7  P10 8   50 Hz                         The change between the individual fixed frequency values is  completed with the acceleration and deceleration times set  at P6 5 and P6 6  When the FWD or REV enables are  switched off  
100. 0003E   October 2013 www eaton com ix    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    Safety    Warning   Dangerous Electrical Voltage     Before Commencing the Installation    Disconnect the power supply of the device   Ensure that devices cannot be accidentally restarted  Verify isolation from the supply   Earth and short circuit the device   Cover or enclose any adjacent live components    Follow the engineering instructions  1L04020001 E  for the  device concerned    Only suitably qualified personnel in accordance with  EN 50110 1  2  VDE 0105 Part 100  may work on this  device system    Before installation and before touching the device ensure  that you are free of electrostatic charge    The functional earth  FE  PES  must be connected to the  protective earth  PE  or the potential equalization  The  system installer is responsible for implementing this  connection    Connecting cables and signal lines should be installed so  that inductive or capacitive interference does not impair  the automation functions    Install automation devices and related operating elements  in such a way that they are well protected against  unintentional operation    Suitable safety hardware and software measures should  be implemented for the 1    interface so that an open  circuit on the signal side does not result in undefined  states in the automation devices    Ensure a reliable electrical isolation of the extra low  voltage of the 24V supply  Only use power supply units  complying with 
101. 020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Modbus Process Data    Process data is processed in the M Max frequency inverter faster than the display values   error codes and parameters     Input Process Data  The input process data is used to control the M Max frequency inverter     Serial Interface  Modbus RTU                                            ID Modbus Register Designation Value Range Type   2001 32001  42001 Fieldbus control word  BUS      Binary code  2002 32002  42002 Fieldbus general control word  BUS      Binary code  2003 32003  42003 Fieldbus speed setpoint  BUS  0 01 96   2004 32004  42004 PID controller  setpoint 0 01 96   2005 32005  42005 PID actual value 0 01     2006 32006  12006     Im   2007 32007  42007           2008 32008  42008       4 3   2009 32009  42009       EM   2010 32010  42010       25   2011 32011  42011     c E          Control Word  ID 2001     These bits are used to control the M Max frequency inverter  The content can be adapted to  your own application and then sent as a control word to the frequency inverter                                                        Description  Bit Value   0 Value   1  0 Stop Operation  1 Clockwise rotating field  FWD  Anticlockwise rotating field  REV   2 No action Reset error  3 As per setting P6 8 Free coasting  overwrite value from P6 8   4 As per setting P6 8 Ramp  overwrite value from P6 8   5 No action Overwrite acceleration deceleration ramps to 0 1 s  6 No action Block setpoint  speed not variab
102. 044 06  35 L2N 13        V T2           MMX11AA2D4_  MMX11AA2D8_ Goo oO ole  MMX11AA3D7_  MMX12AA3D7 0 2 2 5 24 12 8 0 31 0 5 0 8 037   044 05  35 L1 L2 N          V T2 W T3  MMX12AA4D8_  MMX12AA7D0_ Qoo O Ole  MMX32AA3D7 0 2 2 5 24   12 8 0 31 0 5 0 6 037   044 0 6x3 5 L1 12  13      V T2 wits  MMX32AA4D8_  MMX32AA7D0_ ooo    ojo  MMX34AA3D3 02 25 24   12 8 0 31 05 06 037   044 06  35 L1 WN L3 R  R  UMI V T2 W T3  MMX34AA4D3_  MMX34AA5D6_      o         36 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Arrangement and Size of the Connection Terminals  continued                                                                                 Installation                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           TES       a         1 M3    Part  Numbers       AWG mm in Nm ft lbs mm Terminal Configuration  FS3 MMX11AMD8     02 4 24   10 8 0 31 0 5 0 6 037   044 0 6x3 5 L2N 13 UTI V T2           Jo O O oje  MMX12AA9D6_     02 4 24   10 8 0 31 0 5 0 6 037   044 0 6x3 5 L1 L2 N U T1 V T2   
103. 1    Inverted    Inverted PID control  P9 9   1  is used in applications in which  the feedback value generator supplies an inverted signal    Example  With increasing pressure  a pressure sensor output    signal  4 10V   0V   0   max  bar  drops       P9 10    132              PID controller  D rate time       0 10s    Differential time constant    0 00       P9 11    1431     4               controller  output filter  delay time       0 00 10 00s    0 0       P9 12    1016    J          Sleep mode  frequency       0   6 4 Hz    The frequency inverter stops automatically if the frequency of  the drive drops below the sleep level defined by this parameter  for a longer period than the time defined by parameter P9 14    0 00       P9 13    1018    Jv      Sleep mode  wake up setpoint       0 00 100     The wake up setpoint defines the value which the PID controller  process value  P9 6  must drop below before a RUN mode of    the frequency inverter is restored     25 0       P9 14    1017    Sleep mode  delay time       0 36005    This parameter determines the minimum period in which the  frequency inverter must stay below the frequency set at P9 12    before the frequency inverter is stopped    30       96    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com                         lt     PID Controller  continued          Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P9 15 1433 V     Hysteresis  upper limit 0 0  0 00 100   
104. 1   3000s 121 3 0  P14 10 346 X rw Deceleration time  2PS   dec3  0 1   3000s 121 3 0  P14 11 355 X rw V Hz characteristic curve  2PS  0   Linear 122 0  1   Squared  2   Configurable  P14 12 354 X rw Torque increase  2  5  0   Deactivated 122 0  1   Activated    14 13 353 X rw Motor temperature protection 0   Deactivated 122 0   2PS  1 Alarm  2   Fault  stop according to P6 8  P14 14 469 X rw Motor ambient temperature  2  5     20  to 100  C 122 40  P14 15 470 X rw Motor cooling factor at zero 0 0 15096 122 40 0  frequency  2  5     14 16 471    rw Motor thermal time constant  2PS  1   200 min 122 45  Note       Factory settings dependent on specific drive selected     176    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Appendix A    System Parameters                                                          Access  FS User   PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  Hard  and Software Information   1 1 833 X ro API SW ID     125 0   1 2 834 X ro API SW Version    125 0   1 3 835 X ro Power SW ID     125 0  514 836         Power SW Version     125 0  515 837    ro Application ID     125 0  516 838    ro Application revision     125 0   1 7 839 X ro System load 90 125 0  Communication   210 808 X ro Communication status In xx yyy format 125   xx   Number of error messages    0   64            number of correct messages   0   999    S220 809      rw Fieldbus protocol 0   FB disabled 125 0   1  Modbus RTU  S230 810 V rw S
105. 2    208 2 8 42 0 55 27 3 4 2 2 FS1  MMX12AA3D7_ 3 7 5 6 0 75 3 2 3 2 FS2        12    408   48 72 11 4 6  1 2 4 2 FS2  MMX12AA7D0_ 7 10 5 1 5 6 3 2 6 8 FS2  MMX12AA9D6_ 9 6 14 4 2 2 8 7 3 9 6 FS3  3 AC 230V  50 60 Hz   177 264V  0   45 66 Hz  0    MMX32AA1D7_ 1 7 2 6 0 25 1 4 1 4 6 150 FS1  MMX32AA2D4_ 24 3 6 0 37 2 1 2 2 2 FS1  MMX32AA2D8 2 8 42 0 55 2 7 3 4 2 2 FS1  MMX32AA3D7_ 3 7 5 6 0 75 32 1 32 FS2  MMX32AMDS   48 72 11 4 6 1 1 2 42 FS2  MMX32AA7D0_ 7 10 5 15 6 3 2 6 8 FS2  MMX32AAQ011 11 144 22 8 7 3 9 6 FS3  MMX32AA017 17 26 3 4 14 8 5 15 2 FS4  MMX32AA025 _ 25 37 5 5 5 19 6 75 22 FS4  MMX32AA031_ 31 46 5 75 26 4 10 28 FS5  MMX32AA038_ 38 57 11 38 15 28 FS5  Notes    The input voltage of 115V is raised to 230V  output voltage  through an internal voltage double connection       Rated motor currents for normal four pole internally and surface cooled three phase asynchronous motors   1500 RPM at 50 Hz  1800 RPM at 60 Hz        Calculated motor output  no standard value      M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 11    M Max Series Overview    Power Connection Voltages  continued                                                                                     Overload  Rated Current  Current  150   Assigned Motor Rating  P P   le 1150  400V  50 Hz   460V  60 Hz   Part Number  A   A   kW   A  6  hp   A  6 Frame Size  3 AC 400V  50 60 Hz   323 528V  0   45 66 Hz  0    MMX34AA1D3   1 3 2 0 37 1 1 1 2 1 1 FS1  MMX34AA1D9   1 9 2 
106. 20 mm in all operating conditions and always 50 mm to the   active  neighbor     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 27    Installation    Fixing    You can mount an M Max frequency inverter on screw    mounts or on a mounting rail     Install the frequency inverter only on a nonflammable  mounting base  for example  on a metal plate      Dimensions and weights of the M Max frequency inverter    are located in the appendix   Fastening with Screws  FS1 FS5     The number and arrangement of required bore holes   mounting dimensions a1 and b1 shown in the figure below   are also imprinted in the base plate of the M Max device     FS1 FS3     Mounting Dimensions    1      a   lt  lt                                0 28 in     7 mm           Install the screws in the specified positions first  Then set  the frequency inverter on the prepared wall mount and    tighten all screws        fl                   b1    Configuration for Mounting with Screws                                                                                                                        1                   AT O OO  FS1 and FS2 FS  FS4 and FS5  a1 b1 Mass Torque Mounting  mm  in  mm  in  kg  Ib  Nm  ft lb  Screw  FS1  38 1 5  147  5 79  0 55  1 2  1 3  0 95    4  FS2 62 5  2 46  182  7 17  0 71 5  1 3  0 95    4  FS3 75  2 95  242  9 53  0 99  2 2  1 3  0 95    5    54 140  5 51  351  13 82  8  18 0  4 6  3 4    6  FS5 140 551  398  13 82  10  22 0  4 6  3 4 
107. 42    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    List of Figures  continued    Digital Inputs with Internal Supply Voltage                                     Digital Inputs with External Supply Voltage                                      Digital Inputs with Internal Supply Voltage  Negative Logic  Sink Type                Digital Inputs with External Supply Voltage  Negative Logic  Sink Type                Digital Output DO and Connection Examples                                   Connection Example and Operation of DO in Source and Sink                            Relay Outputs with Connection Examples  Control Relay  With  Suppressor Circuit    s  d edel denies im CREE edt queant    Fixed Connection Cables at U  gt 48V  Relay                                       Connection Terminals of the Serial Interface and Microswitch S4   Bus Terminating Resistor                                                 Two Wire RS485                                                              1  MMXI TN Block               unt te d nk tren RC edes  IMMXT2 z F  BIoOCK BIAgEarri                                                            ors  MMX32  MMX34 and MMX35 Block Diagram                                  Operational Data Indicator  Operational                                          Operation  RUN  via Control Signal Terminal  1 0  with  Left Rotating Field  REV   for example   12 34 Hz               
108. 7 P14 10   P6 3 P6 6  drives control   P14 11   P11 1  P14 12   P11 7  V f control   P14 13 P14 16   P8 6 P8 9  protection function                                                                    Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P14 1 1347 X     Motor rated current  2PS  le  0 2 X 12 2 X lg le   Rated operational current of the frequency inverter   See motor rating plate   P14 2 1352 X     Current limit  2PS  1 5xle  0 2 x le 2 X lg 1 5 x le  P14 3 1350 X    Motor rated speed  2  5      300 20 000 RPM  See motor nameplate   P14 4 1351 X     Motor power factor  cos      2  5      0 30 1 00  See motor nameplate   P14 5 1348 X     Motor rated operating voltage  2PS      180 676V  See motor nameplate   Pay attention to the supply voltage and the type of circuit  in the stator winding  P14 6 1349 X     Motor nominal frequency  2PS  60 00  30 320 Hz  See motor rating plate   P14 7 1343 X     Minimum frequency  2PS  0 00  0 00 P14 8 Hz      P14 8 1344 X     Maximum frequency  2PS  60 00  P14 7 320 Hz       14 9 1345          Acceleration time  2PS   acc3  3 0  0 1 3000s      P14 10 1346 V     Deceleration time  2PS   dec3  3 0  0 1 3000s      Note     Default values vary based on actual unit ratings   M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 121    Parameters    Second Parameter Set  continued    PNU    ID    Access  RUN    Value Range    Factory Setting  Description  P1 3        P14 11    1355    X    V Hz
109. 76 0   control signal terminal 16   P3 37 480     rw Manual mode Like P3 2 76 0  Analog Output  Access  FS User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P4 1 307 V rw AO signal  Analog Output  0   Deactivated 11 1  1   Output frequency  Hz   2   Output current       3   Torque  96   4   PID controller  96   P4 2 310 V rw AO  minimum value 0 0V 71 1  1   2V  live zero   P4 3 1456      rw AO  gain 0 00 200 0096 11 100 00  P4 4 1477 V rw AO  filter time 0 00   10 00s 71 0 0       166 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Appendix       Digital Output    A       FS User    PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P5 1 313      rw        Signal 0   Deactivated 78 2   Relay 1 Output  1  READY   2 RUN   3   FAULT   4   Error message  inverted    5   ALARM   6   REV   7   Output frequency   8   Motor controller active   9   7ero frequency   10   Frequency monitoring 1   11   Frequency monitoring 2   12   PID monitoring   13   Overtemperature signal   14   Overcurrent control active   15   Overvoltage control active   16   PLC Sequence control active    17   PLC sequence control  single step  completed    18   PLC sequence control  program cycle  completed    19   PLC sequence control  pause  20   Counter  value 1 reached   21   Counter  value 2 reached   22   RUN message active  23   Analog min reference error  24   LOG function fulfilled    25   PID controller  actual value  monitoring    26   E
110. 9 0 55 15 3 4 1 6 FS1  MMX34AA2D4_ 24 3 6 0 75 1 9 1 2 1 FS1  MMX34AA3D3_ 3 3 5 1 1 2 6 1 1 2 3 FS2  MMX34AA4D3__ 43 6 5 1 5 3 6 2 3 4 FS2          4    506   5 6 84 22 5 3 48 FS2  MMX34AA7D6_ 7 6 11 4 3 6 6 4G 640 FS3  MMX34AA9DO   9 13 5 4 8 5 5 7 6 FS3          4    017  12 18 5 5 11 3 74 2 11 FS3  MMX34AA014 14 21 7150 15 26 10 9 14 FS3  MMX34AA016 _ 16 24 75 15 2 10 14 FS4  MMX34AA023_ 23 34 5 11 21 7 15 21 FS4  MMX34AA031_ 31 46 5 15 29 3 20 27 FS5  MMX34AA038_ 38 57 18 5 36 25 34 FS5  3 AC 575V  50 60 Hz   489 632 5V  0   45 66 Hz  0    MMX35AA1D7_ 17 2 6 0 75 1 7 1 1 7 FS3  MMX35AA2D7 27 4 15 27 2 2 7 FS3  MMX35AA3D9   3 9 5 9 22 3 9 3 3 9 FS3  MMX35AA6D1_ 6 1 9 2 4 6 1 5 6 1 FS3  MMX35AA9DO   9 0 13 5 5 5 9 0 7 5 9 0 FS3  Notes       Rated motor currents for normal four pole internally cooled and surface cooled three phase asynchronous motors   1500 min   at 50 Hz  1800 min  at 60 Hz        Calculated motor output  no standard value        Operation with reduced load torque  about  10  My        Allocated motor output at a maximum ambient temperature of 104  F  40  C  and a maximum pulse frequency of 4 kHz     12 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Description of the M Max  The following drawing shows an M Max device     Overview of the M Max Device  FS1 FS3                       M Max Series Overview    Overview of the M Max Device  FS4 and FS5                    SS    WG                                                
111. Access Factory Setting   PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3    P3 33 1420 V     DI3 logic  control signal terminal 10  0  Like P3 31 Function   P3 34 1421               logic  control signal terminal 14  0  Like P3 31 Function   P3 35 1422          DI5 logic  control signal terminal 15  0  Like P3 31 Function   P3 36 1423 V     DI6 logic  control signal terminal 16  0  Like P3 31 Function   P3 37 1480          Manual mode 0          Like P3 2    Changes from fieldbus mode  Modbus  CANopen  PROFIBUS     and so on  to manual mode  The control level and setpoint  Source required in manual mode can be set at parameters P6 31    to P6 33        Example A  P3 1   1  P6 8   0     DI1  FWD    012   REV       eS a          FWD    fout   Motor        REV       The start enable via control signal terminal 8  DI1  is always  required for operation     e Actuation control signal terminal 8  DI1    Start enable   clockwise rotating field  FWD     e Actuation control signal terminal 8  011  plus control signal  terminal 9  DI2  2 Start enable anticlockwise rotating field   REV     The separate actuation of control signal terminal 9  DI2  does  not allow any start enable     Example B  P3 1   2    Example  Start Stop Impulse                      424V   STOP  cR   OFF   FWD   ON   REV  RUN  T   A               DI2 DI3  P3 4 3  K1    Standard actuation for a drive with pushbutton switch   Normally open  Normally closed  and self actuating     Parameter P3 1   2 enables this actuation via
112. ET DN A DeviceNet Fieldbus Interface Card                             157  Door Keypad  Mounting        usu                                   babe dale baat ale sot ale andes 180  Door Keypad Cut out Dimensions                                           183  Door Keypad  DIMENSIONS                                   dte oad                     qi ee 184    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com vii    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    List of Tables    Uriit GonversiondExamples  as rr vb               RAS Be be ses  Nameplate  NSCHPUONS 3 2  m dp tetur                              aut Aedes dtd  Type Designation of the M Max Frequency Inverters                               Examples         General Rated Operational Data                                             Power Connection  VOltageS                        eR eu cp Ae hee  Maintenance Measures and Intervals                                         Identification on the Residual Current Circuit Breakers                            Assignment of Frequency Inverters to Example Motor Circuit                      Minimum Clearance and Required Cooling Air                                  Stripping Lengths in the Power Section in inches  mm                            Arrangement and Size of the Connection Terminals                              Possible Connection Line Sizes and Specifications on Control Signal Terminals        Factory Set Control Terminal Functions              
113. Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   S2 6 813 V     Parity type 0  0 None  1 Even  2 Odd  52 7 814 V     Communication timeout 0  0   Not used  1   15  2   25  22299   up to 255s  52 8 815        Reset communication status  0   Not used  1   Resets parameter S2 1  Unit Counter  53 1 827        MWh counter 0 00  S3 2 828 X     Operating days  d  0  S3 3 829 X     Operating hours  h  0  S3 4 840 X 0 0000 RUN counter  days     53 5 841 X 0 24 RUN counter  hours    53 6 842 X 0  0000 Fault alarm counter      User Set  S4 1 830 0 15 Display contrast 15  S42 831    Restore factory defaults 0  0   Factory setting or changed value  user setting for parameter   1   Restores factory settings for all parameters  54 3 832        Password 0000  The password protection applies to all parameters  Password forgotten  see  Service and Warranty  on Page 17   Setting a password requires user to select a value and confirm  value a second time  Password protection can be disabled by  inputting the password value into parameter 54 3 after it has  been set  All other parameter changes will require the password  before the user can modify   0000 Deactivated  0001 9999 Activated  set individual password  126 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   O  tober 2013 www eaton com    Parameters    Operational Data Indicator  MON    By applying the specified supply voltage  L1  L2 N  L3   the LCD display is illuminated      Power ON  and all segments are shown briefly  T
114. Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    133    Serial Interface  Modbus RTU     Structure of the Master Request    Address     e The address  1 to 255  of the frequency inverter to be sent  the request is entered in parameter S2 3  Only the  frequency inverter with this address can respond to the  request    e Address 0 is used as a so called Broadcast  message to all  slaves  from the master  In this mode  individual slaves  cannot be addressed and data cannot be output from the  slaves    Function Code    Function Code     The function code defines the type of message  The  following operations can be executed on the M Max                              hex  Designation Description  03 Read Holding Registers Reading of the holding registers in the slave  process data  parameters  configuration   A master request enables up to 11 registers to be read  04 Read Input Registers Reading of the input registers in the slave  process data  parameters  configuration   A master request enables up to 11 registers to be read  06 Write Single Register Writing of a holding register in the slave  With a general telegram  Broadcast  the appropriate holding registers are written in all slaves  The register is read back for comparison  10 Write Multiple Register Writing of several holding registers in the slave  With a general telegram  Broadcast  the appropriate holding registers are written in all slaves  A master request enables up to 11 registers to be read  Data Normal
115. Frequency Set Value STOP     10V AI1 GND 24V        012       117213 6 8 9      QG    R11 FWD REV                Start   gt  Run  Set Save    Stop  0 Hz       MNO04020003E   October 2013  www eaton com    Operation    55    Error and Warning Messages    Error and Warning Messages    Introduction   M Max frequency inverters have several internal monitoring  functions  When deviations from the correct operating status  are detected  faults  FAULT  and warning messages   ALARM  are differentiated between     Error Messages    Faults can cause defective functionality and technical  defects  The inverter  frequency inverter output  is  automatically disabled if a fault is detected  After this  the  connected motor comes to a stop freely     Error messages are shown on the display with an arrowhead  A under FAULT and with the error code F     F1   last fault   F2   second to last  and so on      Example of an Error Message  Undervoltage           READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT  REF   2                7    2    09  PAR             m    v v J  FWD REV    KEYPAD BUS    Acknowledge Fault Message  Reset     The current error message flashes  for example  F1 09   It  can be acknowledged by pressing the OK button followed by  BACK RESET or by actuating DI5  default settings control  signal terminal 15   The displayed error then automatically  stops flashing  the four horizontal bars  Reset  are shown and  the error message is then displayed continuously  The arrow  point A underneath FAULT di
116. Hz       FFI  P10 2   20 Hz The transition time from FF1 to FF2 is one second   FF2  P10 3   40 Hz Parameter P10 13 should therefore be set to a value greater  than one second              Fixed Frequency Setpoint Value    Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3     P10 11 1438        Set time for        0    0 1000s Os   Fixed frequency FFO deactivated   sequence control P10 9     P10 12 1439         Set time for FF1 0    0 1000s Os   Fixed frequency FF1 deactivated   sequence control P10 9     P10 13 1440        Set time for FF2 0    0 10005 Os   Fixed frequency     2 deactivated   sequence control P10 9     P10 14 1441          Set time for FF3 0    0 10005 Os   Fixed frequency FF3 deactivated   sequence control P10 9     P10 15 1442        Set time for     4 0    0 1000s Os   Fixed frequency FF4 deactivated   sequence control P10 9     P10 16 1443        Set time for FF5 0    0 10005 0 s   Fixed frequency FF5 deactivated   sequence control P10 9     P10 17 1444        Set time for        0    0 1000s Os   Fixed frequency FF6 deactivated   sequence control P10 9     P10 18 1445        Set time for FF7 0    0 1000s Os   Fixed frequency FF7 deactivated   sequence control P10 9                                                        M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 103    Parameters    Example A  P10 9   1  Execute program cycle once     P10 10   0  see Page 102   The fixed frequencies FFO to FF7     10 1
117. IEC 60364 4 41  VDE 0100 Part 410  or  HD384 4 41 S2    Deviations of the input voltage from the rated value must  not exceed the tolerance limits given in the specifications   otherwise this may cause malfunction and dangerous  operation       Emergency stop devices complying with IEC EN 60204 1  must be effective in all operating modes of the automation  devices  Unlatching the emergency stop devices must not  cause a restart    Devices that are designed for mounting in housings or  control cabinets must only be operated and controlled  after they have been installed and with the housing closed   Desktop or portable units must only be operated and  controlled in enclosed housings    Measures should be taken to ensure the proper restart of  programs interrupted after a voltage dip or failure  This  should not cause dangerous operating states even for a  short time  If necessary  emergency stop devices should  be implemented    Wherever faults in the automation system may cause  injury or material damage  external measures must be  implemented to ensure a safe operating state in the event  of a fault or malfunction  for example  by means of  separate limit switches  mechanical interlocks  and so on     Depending on their degree of protection  adjustable  frequency drives may contain live bright metal parts   moving or rotating components  or hot surfaces during and  immediately after operation    Removal of the required covers  improper installation  or  incorrect operation o
118. M Max    Series Adjustable Frequency Drive       User Manual    Effective October 2013  Supersedes February 2013       Xxx              4  2  4  2  2  2  2  Z  A  4  7  2  A  2        I               INNSNSSSNSNNNM       ETN    Powering Business Worldwide    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Liability    The information  recommendations  descriptions and safety notations in this document are  based on Eaton Corporation s   Eaton   experience and judgment and may not cover all  contingencies  If further information is required  an Eaton sales office should be consulted   Sale of the product shown in this literature is subject to the terms and conditions outlined  in appropriate Eaton selling policies or other contractual agreement between Eaton and  the purchaser     THERE ARE NO UNDERSTANDINGS  AGREEMENTS  WARRANTIES  EXPRESSED OR  IMPLIED  INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR  MERCHANTABILITY  OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFICALLY SET OUT IN ANY EXISTING  CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES  ANY SUCH CONTRACT STATES THE ENTIRE  OBLIGATION OF EATON  THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BECOME  PART OF OR MODIFY ANY CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES     In no event will Eaton be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract  in tort  including  negligence   strict liability or other wise for any special  indirect  incidental or consequential  damage or loss whatsoever  including but not limited to damage or loss of u
119. M Max frequency inverter which protects  the motor from overheating  The temperature protection is  calculated  A direct temperature measuring in the windings  of the motor  see thermistor protection  offers great protection     The reaction of the M Max frequency inverter to a  detected thermal overload can be set via parameter P8 6   At parameter P8 8 you can set the cooling output              on the motor at zero frequency  standstill   Note the  specifications of the motor manufacturer     Possible setting values are 0 150  of the cooling output at  the rated frequency fy  see nameplate of the motor   P7 6      If the protection function is deactivated  P8 6   0   the  temperature model of the motor is reset to zero     The thermal current ly corresponds with the load current at  maximum thermal load rating on the motor  In continuous  operation  at rated frequency  fN   P7 6  and rated loading   the value of lj  corresponds with the rated operational  current of the motor  see the motor rating plate   P7 1      Motor Cooling Power                  150     100                      8 8                      P7 6  fn f  Hz              The time constant for the motor temperature  P8 9  defines   how long it takes until the temperature has achieved 6396 of  its end value in the motor  In practice  this temperature time  is constant depending on the type and design of the motor  It  varies between the different design sizes at the same shaft   power and between the different 
120. MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 77    Parameters    Digital Outputs  P5     The M Max series frequency inverters have three digital  outputs in different specifications     e Relay              contact R13 R14  control signal terminals  22 and 23    Digital Outputs                                                                                        e Relay RO2  changeover contact R21 R22        contact  t  control signal terminals 25 and 24  R21 R24  N O contact     3  amp  3 4 olg     control signal terminals 25 and 26                m      B         22  23  25  24  26 13 20     Transistor output DO  control signal terminal 13  DO      E    Control signal terminal 20  DO     Input of the supply E e     voltage for the transistor output          Notes on electrical connections are found on Pages 44  and 45   The messages listed under parameter P5 1 can be assigned  multiple times  These are independent of the selected  control level and operating mode   Digital Outputs  Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P5 1 313         RO1 Signal  Relay 1 Output  2  0 Deactivated  1 READY  the frequency inverter is ready for operation  2 RUN  the inverter of the frequency inverter is enabled   FWD  REV   3 FAULT  error message  Error detected  2 STOP   4 Error message inverted  no error message   5 ALARM  warning message  See  Protective Functions  P8   on Page 90  6 REV  Reverse run   anticlockwise rotating field active  7 Output frequency   frequ
121. MX32        400V  MMX34_   e 575V  MMX35_     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 1    About this Manual    Input Supply Voltages   The rated operating voltages stated in the following table are  based on the standard values for networks with a grounded  star point     In ring networks  as found in Europe  the rated voltage at the  transfer point of the power supply companies is the same as    the value in the consumer networks  for example  230V  400V      In star networks  as found in North America   the rated  voltage at the transfer point of the utility companies is higher  than in the consumer network  Example  120V     gt  115V   240V     gt  230V  480V     gt  460      Units   Every physical dimension included in this manual uses  imperial units  For the purpose of the equipment s UL  certification  some of these dimensions are accompanied by  their equivalents in metric or Syst  me International d Unites   SI  units     Unit Conversion Examples    The wide tolerance range of M Max frequency inverters  takes into account a permissible voltage drop of an additional  4   Ui N 714926  in load networks  while  in the 400V  category  it takes into account the North American line  voltage of 480V  10   60 Hz      The permissible connection voltages for the M Max series  are listed in  Appendix A      The rated operational data of the input voltage is always  based on the input frequencies 50 60 Hz  50 Hz  1096 to  60 Hz  10       
122. Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive     04020003                 2013 www eaton com 179    Appendix       Appendix     Door Panel Keypad Adapter System   Mounting Instructions  Overview    The door keypad is used for remote control drivers  It is installed on the door of a cabinet   For the installation  you need the following parts  See the figure below     Door Keypad Mounting Kit       Door Keypad Components  Item Description    Door keypad base       Text panel  cool gray          Door panel adapter       1  2  3 Door cable with attached grounding cable  4  5    Screws  4 pcs        Note  Make sure that you have received all necessary parts     180 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Appendix       Mounting Procedure    Door Keypad Mounting Instructions  Step Instructions    1 Make an opening in the cabinet door for the control keypad according the dimensions on Page 183   Make the holes in the cabinet door for the screws using the dimensions on Page 183     Cabinet Door          2 Place the control keypad base  item 1  toward the opening so that the screw holes you made in the cabinet door meet the bushings  on the backside of the base  See figures below     Rear View  Cabinet Door                                                                         3 Fix the base on the cabinet door by tightening the screws  item 5            Leave One Screw  Still Unfixed       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   Oc
123. NU ID RUN Value Range    Parameters    Factory Setting  Description  P1 3        P11 4 604 X      V Hz characteristic curve  mean frequency value 60 00       0 00 P11 2  Hz     Definition of a frequency value for the voltage value set under  P11 5    Defined ratio  break point  for the defined V Hz characteristic  curve  P11 1   2  see characteristic P11 1   2        P11 5 605 X m    V Hz characteristic curve  mean voltage value 100 00       0 00 P11 3    Definition of a voltage value for the frequency value set under  P11 4    Defined ratio  break point  for the defined V Hz characteristic  curve  P11 1   2  see characteristic P11 1   2        P11 6 606 X      Output voltage at 0 Hz 0 00       0 00 40 0096    Definition of a start voltage at 0 Hz  zero frequency voltage   Note  A high start voltage enables a high torque at the start    A Caution  A high torque at low speed causes a high thermal  load on the motor  If temperatures are too high  the motor  should be equipped with an external fan       P11 7 109 X        Torque increase 0       Deactivated       Enabled    Automatic increase of the output voltage  Boost  with an  increased load and low speed  for example  heavy starting duty     A Caution  A high torque at low speed leads to a high thermal  load on the motor    Note  If temperatures are too high  the motor should be fitted  with an external fan       P11 8 600 X        Control mode 0       Frequency control  V Hz     The setpoint entry controls the output frequ
124. Optional fieldbus inter       ace is not fitted    frame  MMX NET XA   Error message as per P8 15    Further notes are provided in the optional fieldbus interface  manual  CANopen  PROFIBUS DP  and so on              58 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Error and Warning Messages    Acknowledge Fault  Reset     By switching the supply voltage off  the error message  F  FAULT  is acknowledged and reset   The error code with the respective operating times  d   days  H   hours  M   minutes   remains stored  FLT      In the factory setting  you can also acknowledge the error with a 24 Vdc signal on terminal 15   DI5   Reset   The error code is not deleted in this case     The following table shows the required operations for acknowledging an error message via  the operating unit     Error Messages via Operating Unit    Operating Unit Element Explanation  READY RUN STOP              FAULT F1   Current fault message  flashing display   5 in    ET PA 09   Undervoltage  example     eU LEX ngo   211 UJI  Ze dubi Tre ES        FWD REV 1 0 KEYPAD BUS       Actuate the BACK RESET button or terminal 015  reset  to  acknowledge the error message                   READY RUN STOP ALARM FAUL  1            MON      a   a               PAR      RS   6  J  FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS E     5  lt  a  OE  218  Iv  READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT The acknowledged fault message is displayed with READY and    the failure code    o E11 00           og  udi  iau
125. P1 3   P9 1 163 V     PID Controller 0   0 Deactivated   1 Activated for drive control   2 Activated for external application  P9 2 118  4   PID controllers  P gain 100   0 100096 Proportional Gain  KP    Low values attenuate the control action  High values can cause oscillation   P9 3 119 V     PID controller    reset time 10 0   0 3205 Integral time constant  P9 4 167 V     PID controller setpoint  keypad reference 0 0   0 100  Setpoint setting range utilizing keypad as reference P9 5   0  P9 5 332         PID controller  setpoint source 0       The setting range is limited by P6 3  raised starting frequency    and P6 4  end frequency    0 Keypad  P9 4    1 Fieldbus   2        3 AI2       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 95    Parameters    PID Controller  continued    PNU    ID    Access  RUN Value Range    Description    Factory Setting   P1 3        P9 6    334    Jv    gt     PID controller  process variable  PV  source   Actual value or feedback        Fieldbus            and S2   see figure on Page 39     P2 1   0  0 mA OV   P2 1 2 1  4 mA 2V        Al2 and S3   see figure on Page 39     P2 5   0  0 mA OV   P2 5   1  4 mA 2V     2       P9 7    336    J           PID controller  actual value limiting  minimum       0 10096    0 0       P9 8    337    J        PID controller  actual value limiting  maximum       0 100     100 0       P9 9    340           PID controller  controller deviation       0    Not inverted       
126. P10 5    127    Fixed frequency FF4 30 00       0 00   6 4    0 00 Hz up to the maximum frequency value  P6 4     For activation  parameter P3 11 must be assigned a third digital  input  For example  P3 11   5  DI5  control signal terminal 15     This value can then be called up directly via DI3    Note  In the factory setting  DI5  control signal terminal 15  is  assigned with the error acknowledgement  Reset   Setting  P3 11   0 is recommended       P10 6    128    Fixed frequency FF5 36 00       0 00   6 4    0 00 Hz up to the maximum frequency value  P6 4     For activation  parameter P3 11 must be assigned a third digital  input  For example  P3 11   5  DI5  control signal terminal 15    see Note on P10 5     This value can be called directly by joint actuation of control  signal terminals 10  DI3  and 15  015        P10 7    129    Fixed frequency FF6 48 00       0 00 P6 4    0 00 Hz up to the maximum frequency value  P6 4     For activation  parameter P3 11 must be assigned a third digital  input  For example  P3 11   5  DI5  control signal terminal 15   see Note on P10 5     This value can be called directly by joint actuation of control  signal terminals 14  014  and 15  015        P10 8    130    Fixed frequency FF7 60 00       0 00 P6 4    0 00 Hz up to the maximum frequency value  P6 4     For activation  parameter P3 11 must be assigned a third digital  input  For example  P3 11   5  DI5  control signal terminal 15    see Note on P10 5     This value can be calle
127. Parameters    Logic Function  P13     The logic function enables you to link both parameters P13 1  A  and P13 2  B  logically with  each other  The result  LOG  can then be assigned to the digital outputs DO  P5 3   RO1  P5 1   and RO2  P5 2   The type of operation  And  Or  Exclusive Or  is defined in parameter P13 3     Logic Linking of A and B                                              R24                   6    Example  Digital output RO1  N O contact R13 R14  is required to indicate during operation  that the set current limit has been reached     P5 1   24  LOG function fulfilled   P13 1   2  Operation  RUN   signal A  P13 2 227  Current monitoring  signal B    13 3   0  AAND B    118 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com                         lt     Logic Function                            Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P13 1 1453 X     LOG function  Selection input A 0  Value range for signal A  0 Deactivated  1 READY  the frequency inverter is ready for operation  2 RUN  the inverter of the frequency inverter is enabled   FWD  REV   3 FAULT  error message  Error detected  2 STOP   4 Error message inverted  no error message   5 ALARM  warning message     see  Protective Functions  P8   on Page 90                                                              6 REV  Reverse run   anticlockwise rotating field active  7 Output frequency   frequency setpoint  8 Motor controller active  9 Ze
128. RO1 to indicate operation  e maximum switching capacity  250 Vdc  0 4A  DC voltage    RUN    e maximum switching capacity  250 Vac  2A  AC voltage   N O contact R21 R24  control signal terminal 25 26  of relay    RO2 indicates a detected fault  ERROR   FAULT      If the supply voltage of the frequency inverter is switched off  upon the occurrence of an error message  the N O R21 R24    With voltages greater than 48V  you should fasten the  connection cables of the relay in the opening on the right     housing   4  opens again  relay drops out     Fixed Connection Cables at U  gt 48V  Relay  The functions for which parameters can be defined for both  relays RO1 and RO2 are described in  Digital Outputs  P5    on Page 78        44 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Installation    Serial Interface A B    The following figure shows the connections of the serial interface and the position of the  micro switch for the bus termination resistor     Connection Terminals of the Serial Interface and Microswitch S4   Bus Terminating Resistor        AI2 GND DO  DI4 015 DIG AO DO       R13R14   R24  4 5 13 14 15 16 18 20 22 23 26                                                  1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10                      O     O                                                                                              24V DiC 011012 513    R21R22        E   9 1 92938    11  8 j   x 12   tty   gt    gt          hm       The two control signal te
129. Range Description  P1 3   P11 1 108 X     V Hz characteristic curve 0  0 Linear       The output voltage changes linearly with the output frequency   from zero to voltage P11 3 with the cut off frequency P11 2    By defining a minimum frequency  P6 3   a voltage  corresponding with one of the linear characteristic curves is    output    The V Hz ratio running linearly between zero and the cut off  frequency remains constant    With parameter P11 6  the voltage value can be raised by  percentages in a linear V Hz ratio over the entire manipulating    range       1 Squared       The output voltage changes quadratically with the output  frequency  from zero to voltage P11 3 with the cut off    frequency P11 2    By defining a minimum frequency P6 3  a voltage corresponding  with one of the quadratic characteristic curves is output  The  V Hz ratio running quadratically between zero and the cut off  frequency remains constant    With parameter P11 6  the voltage value can be raised as a  percentage by a quadratic V Hz ratio over the entire  manipulating range       2 Configurable       In connection with parameters P11 4  P11 5 and P11 6  the V Hz  ratio and therefore the parameters for characteristic curve  progress can be defined as required       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 107    Parameters    V Hz Characteristic Curve  P11 1      96                11 3                                                          11 3       V  
130. S User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P10 1 24 V rw Fixed frequency FFO 0 00   P6 4 Hz 101 6 00  P10 2 05      rw Fixed frequency FF1 0 00   P6 4 Hz 101 12 00  P10 3 06 V rw Fixed frequency FF2 0 00   P6 4 Hz 101 18 00  P10 4 26 V rw Fixed frequency FF3 0 00   P6 4 Hz 101 24 00  P10 5 2       rw Fixed frequency FF4 0 00   P6 4 Hz 101 30 00  P10 6 28 V rw Fixed frequency FF5 0 00   P6 4 Hz 101 36 00  P10 7 29 V rw Fixed frequency FF6 0 00   P6 4 Hz 101 48 00    10 8 30      rw Fixed frequency FF7 0 00   P6 4 Hz 101 60 00  P10 9 436 V rw PLC Sequence control  0   Deactivated 102 0  operating mode 1   Program cycle  execute once   2   Execute program cycle continuously   3   Execute program cycle in steps   4   Execute program cycle continuously   n steps  P10 10 437      rw PLC Sequence control  0 255 102 0  program  FWD REV    P10 11 438      rw Set time for FFO 0 100008 103 0  P10 12 439 V rw Set time for FF1 0   10000s 103 0    10 13 440 V rw Set time for FF2 0   10000s 103 0  P10 14 441      rw Set time for FF3 0   10000s 103 0    10 15 442 V rw Set time for FFA 0   10000s 103 0    10 16 443 V rw Set time for FF5 0   10000s 103 0    10 17 444      rw Set time for FF6 0   10000s 103 0    10 18 445 V rw Set time for FF7 0   10000s 103 0                               172 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    V Hz Characteristic Curve    Appendix A                                                 Acces
131. The Stop function can be set at parameter P6 8       No  deactivated     Stop executed only via control signal terminals  I O        fieldbus  BUS    Switching the LOC REM button to KEYPAD removes the  block on the STOP button function set here    Note  This does not deactivate the Reset function  FS  loading with 56 actuation of the STOP button        Yes  activated        P6 17    1427    Secondary remote control source 3       Assignment of the control levels as at P6 1  Control level 2 is activated via parameter P3 25       P6 18    1428    Secondary remote speed reference 2       Assignment of setpoint sources as at P6 2  Setpoint source 2 is activated via parameter P3 26       P6 19    502           Secondary acceleration time        2  10 0       0 1 30005    See Note 1 of parameter P6 5  The activation is executed via parameter P3 15       P6 20    503              Secondary deceleration time  dec2  10 0       0 1 3000s    See Note 1 of parameter P6 6  The activation is executed via parameter P3 15       P6 21    526    X      Acceleration transition frequency  acc1 acc2  0 00       0 00 P6 4 Hz    0 00 Hz   deactivated    If the output frequency set here is exceeded  the  acceleration time is switched automatically from acc1  P6 5   to acc2  P6 19        P6 22    1334    X      Deceleration transition frequency  dec1 dec2  0 00       0 00 P6 4 Hz    0 00 Hz   deactivated    If the output frequency set here is exceeded  the  deceleration time is switched automatically
132. WD      e    The direction can be changed via the two arrow buttons      or     cursor        The drive is factory set to stop at O Hz and can then be run  in the opposite direction by pressing the START button   Parameter P6 14   0 must be set in order to change  direction without a stop    In the default settings  the STOP button is active in  all operating modes     The STOP function can be set via P6 8     e Free coasting    Deceleration ramp    54 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Brief Instructions  Steps to the Motor Start    READY RUN se                                       al  i  li                      Self Test  Set    PAR  4      p                  mAV 22 96 k peur tpm MkWh    Y       FWD REV y KEYPAD BUS          READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT                         s 2             I      PAR  11 I           x  FLT    a4 ww  FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS    Ready to Start  Y  Y  REM   a RUN Stor ALARM FAULT  REF  4              PAR  LI  LL      FLT Hz    bd w  FWD REV lO KEYPAD BUS  Y  Y  TA RUN SIE ALARM FAULT  ena nnn  MON            a                    J    dad       v w  FWD REV 1 0 KEYPAD BUS     lt      Cursor  REV    pem  A     Cursor  FWD                      Frequency Set Value A    Frequency Set Value                 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    READY RUN STOP  ALARM FAULT                   b  nnn    AE LII LN    EE i ne         FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS       Start  Stop   FWD REV     RUN    R11   
133. WD REV  O KEYPAD         24    The display unit consists of a backlit liquid crystal display   LCD   It is divided into four areas    Areas of the LCD Display   Area Description    1 Status  indicator    The arrowheads   A   on the top border show  information regarding the drive     READY   Ready to start   RUN   Operating notification   STOP   Stop  stop command activated  ALARM   Alarm message activated    FAULT   The drive has been stopped due to an error  message       2  Plaintext Two 14  and three 7 segment blocks for displaying   display AL   Alarm message  F   Error messages  M   Measurement value  operating data   P   Parameter numbers  S   System parameter      Anticlockwise field of rotation  REV     The respective units of measurement are displayed in  the bottom line       The arrow  lt q shows the selected main menu   REF   Reference value input  reference   MON   Operational data indicator  monitor   PAR   Parameter levels  FLT   Fault log  Fault     3 Menu level       4 Control  commands    The arrowhead W points to the selected rotating field  direction and the active control level     FWD   Clockwise rotating field  forward run    REV   Counterclockwise rotating field  reverse run   1 0   Via control terminals  input output    KEYPAD   Via control unit   BUS   Via fieldbus  interface        Parameters    General Information on Menu Navigation    By applying the specified supply voltage to the connection  terminals L2 N and L3  MMX11   L1        L2 N  MMX12 
134. ally active  It protects the frequency  inverter from ground faults with high currents       0 Deactivated    If the monitoring is deactivated  the reaction time is shortened  to a start signal    Caution  When the monitoring is deactivated  a ground fault  can cause damage to the inverter    1 Alarm  AL 03   2 Fault  F    03   stop function according to P6 8             90 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Protective Functions  continued    Parameters    Factory Setting                                                                   PNU ID Value Range Description  P1 3   P8 4 709     Stall protection 1  The stall protection function is an overload protection   It protects the motor from brief overloads  for example  blocked  motor shaft   The stall current is equal to the motor rated  operational current x 1 3  stall time is 15 seconds  and stall  frequency limit is 25 Hz  If the current is higher than the limit  and the frequency is less than 25 Hz  the drive will react as  defined by this parameter  Note  With long motor cable lengths and low motor power   poor efficiency cos      a higher  capacitive  motor current can  flow causing early tripping  Solution  Motor reactor or sinus filter  0 Deactivated  1 Alarm  AL 15   2 Fault  F    15   stop function according to P6 8  P8 5 713    Underload protection 0  The underload protection monitors the load of the connected  motor in the range of 5 Hz up to the maximum output  fr
135. am cycle   P5 3   18     e  1  With a continuous program sequence  P10 9   2   P10 9   4   the start signal is switched off first  P3 21        Relay RO2  P5 2   17  indicates the end of the individual  run times  P10 11   P10 18     e Transistor DO  P5 3   18  indicates the end of a program  cycle    Value 19  for example  P5 3   19  enables a pause command   P3 22  of the sequencing control to be indicated via a digital  output     Example A  Program Cycle Executed Once  P10 9   1  P10 10   0        P10 4                P10 3                P10 2                      P10 1                                     P10 11                                                                  1 1  P3 21  PS 1   16                   P5 2   17            Sn pes                    P5 3   18                       104 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Parameters    Example B  Comparable example A     P10 9   1  Execute program cycle once     P10 10   192  see Page 102   This decimal program code  192   64  128  assigns the  clockwise rotating field  REV  to fixed frequencies FF6  P10 7  and FF8  P10 8      Example B  Program Cycle Executed Once  P10 9   1  P10 10   192        P10 4                P10 3                      P10 2             P10 1                                                                                                    ES CT a                                ee           2      peg                                       
136. ated       Alarm  AL 54        Fault  F   54   stop function according to P6 8       94 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    PID Controller  P9     The M Max series frequency inverters are provided with a  PID controller that you activate with P9 1   1  The controller  can be deactivated via a digital input  P3 12      PID control is superimposed on the frequency inverter  function  You should therefore set all of the frequency  inverter s drive related parameters  such as maximum output  frequency  motor speed   acceleration and deceleration  ramps  mechanical load  belts   Frequency inverter and motor  are process integrated actuators  The output frequency to  the motor  which determines the speed  is specified as  manipulated variable from the PID controller        PID Controller    Parameters    When the PID controller is activated  the setpoints and actual  values become process variables and are normalized  automatically into percentages  96   For example  the  specified setpoint  0 100   here is the same as a volume  flow  0 50 m3 h   The actual value here is the volume flow   m3 h  from a suitable sensor  which is evaluated again as a  percentage  0 100       If this process data is to be displayed in the physical variable   m3 h   you can set the conversion with parameter P9 19   see  Display factor  P9 19                                                        Access Factory Setting   PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  
137. ber 2013 www eaton com    Appendix A    149    Appendix       Dimensions and Frame Sizes  Approximate Dimensions in inches  mm  Installation  Part Number a al b b1 b2    0  01 02 Size    MX12AA1D7_ 2 60 1 50 6 30 5 79 1 26 4 02 0 18 E FS1  MX12AA2D4_  66   38   160   147   32   102   4 5   MX12AA2D8_    X32AA1D7  X32AA2  X32AA2    X34AA1  X34AA1  X34AA2       2      gt                co    AB            11    1 3 54 2 46 7 68 747 1 26 4 14 247    FS2     90   62 5   195   182   32   105   5 5     mp       X12AA7    X32AA3  X32AA4  X32AA7    X34AA3      4    4  X34AA5             X11AA4  X12AA9  X32AA0    X34AA7  X34AA9  X34AAD12      4    014    X35AA1D7_  X35AA2D7_  X35AA3D9_  X35AA6D1_  X35AA9D0_    3 94 2 95 9 96 9 53 1 34 4 41 2 17   FS3   100   75   253   242   34   112   5 5                      Oo  Ooo       oO                                               aoe           o                                        N                          ES s                         X32AA012_ 6 50 5 51 14 57 13 82 13 27 6 61 0 28 0 55 FS4  X32AA017_  165 0   140 0   370 0   351 0   337 0   168 0   7 0   14 0   X32AA025_            4    016           lt  lt   lt  lt  lt   lt  lt  lt  lt   lt  lt   lt  lt  lt  lt   lt  lt  lt    lt  lt  zg       lt  lt  lt   lt  lt  lt   lt  lt  lt              MMX32AA031 6 50 5 51 14 57 13 82 15 08 8 07 0 28 0 55 FS5  MMX32AA038 _  165 0   140 0   414 0   398 0   383 0   205 0   7 0   14 0     MMX34AA031  MMX34AA038_          MMX34AA023 _             Not
138. ble routing plate before the electrical  installation     Mounting the Cable Routing Plate and the Brackets                        zx   Opa 2 2  OPED    2     eRe ofl   L           m    11 5 Ib in   1 3 Nm        29    Installation    EMC Installation    The responsibility to comply with the legally stipulated limit  values and thus the provision of electromagnetic  compatibility is the responsibility of the end user or system  operator  This operator must also take measures to minimize  or remove emissions in the environment concerned  see  figure on Page 22   He must also use means to increase the  interference immunity of the system devices     In a drive system  PDS  with frequency inverters  you should  take measures for electromagnetic compatibility  EMC  while  doing your planning  because changes or improvements to  the installation site  which are required in the installation or  while mounting  are normally associated with additional  higher costs     The technology and system of a frequency inverter cause the  flow of high frequency leakage current during operation  All  grounding measures must therefore be implemented with  low impedance connections over a large surface area     With leakage currents greater than 3 5 mA  in accordance  with VDE 0160 or EN 60335  either    e the protective conductor must have a cross section   10 mm       the protective conductor must be open circuit monitored   or    e the second protective conductor must be fitted    For an EMC c
139. bs 22 22 22 17 6 17 6 22 1 22 1   kg   0 99   0 99   0 99   8 0   8 0   10 0   10 0   Notes       Symbols used in technical data and formulas      Allocated motor output with reduced load torque  about 10        Contact the Eaton Drives Technical Resource Center for technical data     146 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Appendix A                                                                                     Device Series MMX35  MMX35AA   N0 0 Symbols    Unit 1D7 2D7 3D9 6D1 900  Rated operational current  12  le A 17 2 7 3 9 6 1 9 0  Overload current for 60s every 600s I A 2 6 4 5 9 9 2 13 5  at 122  F  50  C   Starting current for 2s IL A 3 4 5 4 78 12 2 18 0  every 20s at 122  F  50  C   Assigned motor rating 575V HP HP 1 2 3 5 7 5  Power side  Primary side    Number of phases Three phase   Rated voltage UIN V 575  15  575  41096  60 Hz   Input current         2 3 6 5 7 6 10 4  Maximum leakage current to  ground  PE  without motor   MMX35   N                                Braking torque   Defaul         30   Brake chopper with external Max  100  rated operational current le with external   braking resistance braking resistance   Minimum braking resistance RB ohms 103 103 103 103 103   Switch on threshold for the Upc Vdc Programmable P12 6   braking transistor   DC braking I le   55100  adjustable  Pulse frequency   PWM kHz 6  adjustable 1   16   Heat dissipation at rated     W 190 190           operational current  
140. ces should only be  shipped in their original packaging with suitable  transportation materials  Please take note of the labels and  instructions on the packaging  as well as of those meant for  the unpacked device        Open the packaging with adequate tools and inspect the  contents immediately after receipt in order to ensure that  they are complete and undamaged     Scope of Supply                                  M Max Series Overview    The packaging must contain the following parts     M Max frequency inverter   Accessory kit for EMC suitable installation   Installation instructions         8230 2416   Data carrier  CD ROM  with documentation for M Max    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com              Series Overview    Nameplate Rating Data    The device specific rating data of the M Max is shown on the nameplate on the side of the  device and on the rear of the control signal terminal cover     The inscription of the nameplates has the following meaning  example      Nameplate Inscriptions  Label Meaning    MMX34AA3D3F0 0 Part number                      series frequency inverter  3   Three phase power connection  4   400V voltage category  AA   Instance  software version A and alphanumerical display   3D3   3 3A rated operational current  3 decimal 3   F   Integrated radio interference suppression filter  0   IP20 protection type  0   No integrated optional assembly                   Input Power connection rating   Thr
141. ctual Speed  Frequency Actual Value    The actual speed of the frequency inverter is within a value range of 0 and 10 000  In the  application  this value is scaled to a percentage in the frequency range between the defined  minimum and maximum frequencies        15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  MSB LSB          M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 139    Serial Interface  Modbus RTU     Explanation of Function Code    Function Code 03  hex   Reading of Holding Registers   This function reads the content of a number of consecutive  holding registers  of specified register addresses    Example     Reading of motor speed  ID 2105  and motor current  ID  2106  of the M Max frequency inverter with the slave  address 5     Master request  05 03 0838 0002 4622  hex        Function Code 04  hex   Reading of Input Registers   This function reads the content of a number of consecutive  input registers  of specified register addresses     Example     Reading of motor speed  ID 2105  and motor current  ID  2106  of the M Max frequency inverter with the slave  address 5     Master request  05 04 0838 0002 F3E2  hex                    Hex Name Hex Name   05 Slave address 05 Slave address   03 Function code  reading of holding registers  04 Function code  here  Reading of input registers    0838 2104  dec   The ID number of the first requested 0838 2104  dec   The ID number of the first requested  register is 2105  dec  as the master PLC ha
142. culated  temperature model and uses the motor current set in  parameter P7 1 to determine the motor load  It does not use  a temperature measurement in the motor     The calculated temperature model cannot protect the motor  if the cooling flow to the motor is influenced  for example  by  a blocked air entry way     The temperature model is based on the assumption that the  motor achieves a winding temperature of 284 F  140 C  at  rated speed and an ambient temperature of 104  F  40        with 105  rated load     The cooling efficiency  without external cooling  is a function  of the speed  corresponding with the output frequency of the  frequency inverter   When the motor is stationary  zero   frequency   heat is also dissipated through the housing surface     When the motor is under a great load  the current required by  the motor can be higher than the rated operational current   The current provided by the frequency inverter can be higher  than the rated operational current of the motor  If the load  requires this much current  there is a danger of a thermal  overload  This is especially the case at lower frequencies     25 Hz   Here  the cooling effect  speed of the motor fan   and the load rating of the motor  see data sheet of the motor   are reduced similarly with lower frequencies  On motors that  are equipped with an external fan  there is less of a load  reduction at lower speeds     With parameters P8 6 to P8 9  a motor temperature protection  can be set for the 
143. cy 3  upper value P6 28 P6 4 Hz 87 0 00  P6 30 759 X rw Automatic REAF attempts 1 10 87 3  P6 31 1481 X rw Manual mode  primary control 1   Control signal terminals  1 0  87 1  Source 2   Control unit  KEYPAD   3   Fieldbus  BUS   P6 32 1482 X rw Manual mode  primary speed 0   Fixed frequency          87 3  reference 1   Operating unit  REF   2   Fieldbus  BUS   3      4 Al2  5   Motor potentiometer  P6 33 1483 X rw Manual mode  KEYPAD lock 0   Deactivated 87 1  1   Activated                 Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 169    Appendix                                                                                                                                     Access FS User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P7 1 113 X rw Motor  rated operational current 0 2 x lg 2 x le 89 le   see motor rating plate     7 2 107 X rw Current limit 0 2 x lg 2 x lg 89 1 5 xle  P7 3 112 X rw Motor  rated speed 300 20000            89 1720   see motor rating plate   P7 4 120 X rw Motor  power factor  cos      0 30 1 00 89 0 85   see motor rating plate   P7 5 110 X rw Motor  rated operating voltage 180   500   89      see motor rating plate   P7 6 111 X rw Motor  rated frequency 30 320 Hz 89 60 00   see motor rating plate   Protective Functions  Access  FS User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P8 1 700 X rw Analog minimum reference error 0   Deactivated 90 1   live zero  1   Alarm  2   Fau
144. d  with the M Max frequency inverter     The MMX NET XA mounting plate is fitted on the right hand  side  view from front of the keypad  of the MMX frequency  inverter     e First remove the cover of the interface in the MMX    Removing the Interface Cover on the M Max                                                     Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 153    Appendix       The remaining installation steps are then carried out without any tools  using the cutouts provided in the housing of the MMX  snap fixing      e Fit the plug and connection cable onto the interface of the MMX    Fitting and Connecting the Mounting Plate of the MMX NET XA                                                    You can then fit a fieldbus interface card  for example  Connecting the Interface Card with the Frequency  PROFIBUS DP  and so on  in the cover of the mounting Inverter  frame     Note  Before installing the fieldbus interface card check  whether the plug connection provided  such as GND  or bus terminal resistor have to be changed     Cover of the MMX NET XA for Holding the Fieldbus  Interface Card            Make the connections to the selected fieldbus system  through the opening in the mounting frame directly on the    e Then fit the cover with the inserted fieldbus interface card         onto the already fitted and installed mounting plate of the  MMX NET XA    154 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton c
145. d current for 60s every       13 5 18 21 24 34 5 46 5 57  6008 at 122      50       Starting current for 2s l A 18 24 28 32 46 62 76  every 20s at 122  F  50  C   Apparent power in rated 400V S kVA 6 24 8 32 9 7 11 16 21 5 26 3           40V S kVA     748 9 98 11 64 13 3 19 1 257 31 6  Assigned motor rating 400V P kW 4 5 5 750 75 11 15 18 5  460V HP 5 7 1 2 10 10 15 20 25   Power side  Primary side    Number of phases Three phase   Rated voltage UIN V 380  15  480   109  50 60 Hz    323 528     096  45 66 Hz 4096   Input current LN A 11 5 14 9 18 7 17 1 25 5 33 417       Maximum leakage current to  ground  PE  without motor                                                                MMX34   N PE mA                       MMX34   F_ PE mA                       Braking torque  Default  standard  lle       za 5530 5530 5530 5530 5530  lt 30  Brake chopper with external Max  100  rated operational current    with external braking resistance  braking resistance  Minimum braking resistance RB ohms 54 54 54 28 28 17 17  Switch on threshold for the Upc Vdc Programmable P12 6 765 765 765 765  braking transistor  DC braking         100  adjustable  Pulse frequency   PWM kHz 6  adjustable 1   16  1 4 6  adjustable 1   16   Heat dissipation at rated     W 136 2 185 1 223 7              operational current  le   Efficiency h 0 97 0 97 0 97              Fan  device internal             4            4       temperature controlled   Installation size FS3 FS3 FS3 FS4 FS4 FS5 FS5  Weight m L
146. d deceleration times in P6 5 and P6 6    Function to Control Signal Terminals                               Input  Binary  Fixed Frequency  BO B1 B2  Factory setting   FFO  P10 1   6 Hz  only if P6 2 2 0  X FF1  P10 2   12 Hz  X FF2  P10 3 2 18 Hz  X X FF3  P10 4   24 Hz  X FF4  P10 5   30 Hz  X X FF5  P10 6   36 Hz  X FF6  P10 7   48 Hz  X X X FF7  P10 8   60 Hz       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 73    Parameters    Digital Inputs  continued    PNU    ID    Access    RUN Value Range    Factory Setting  Description  P1 3        P3 12    1020            PID controller deactivate 6       Like P3 2    Allocation of the function to control signal terminals    When switching on  24V power  the PID controller is  blocked via the assigned control signal terminal  DI1 to DI6        P3 13    1400     Not used            P3 14    1401       2 3    External brake  feedback signal  N O  0       Like P3 2    Assignment of control signal terminal       P3 15    1402    J      Change acceleration deceleration time  acc 2 dec 2  0       Like P3 2    Assignment of control signal terminal  Switch acceleration time from acc1  P6 5  to acc2  P6 19   Switch deceleration time from dec1  P6 6  to dec2  P6 20        P3 16    1403             Stop acceleration deceleration time 0       Like P3 2       Assignment of control signal terminal    Stops all acceleration  P6 5  P6 19  P14 9  and deceleration  times  P6 6  P6 20  P14 10        P3 17    1404
147. d directly by joint actuation of control  signal terminals 10  DI3   14  DI4  and 15  DI5        M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 101    Parameters    Sequence Control   The sequence control enables a cyclical program sequence with the fixed frequency setpoints  FFO to FF7  To run the program you can also select from four different operating modes and  assign rotation direction  FWD REV  and run time to the individual fixed frequencies  The  program sequence is programmed in binary code and is represented by a decimal number for  simple entry     Fixed Frequency Setpoint Value  continued       Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P10 9 1436 V     PLC Sequence control  operating mode 0       Selection of operating modes for cyclical program execution    The start of the program execution via a digital input  DI1   DI6   is executed according to parameter P3 21    The pause of the program execution via a digital input  011 016   is executed according to parameter P3 22       Deactivated       Execute program cycle once       Execute program cycle continuously       Execute program cycle in steps                             Execute program cycle continuously in steps  P10 10 1437 V     PLC Sequence control  program  FWD REV  0    0 255 Summated decimal value from the binary coded program  sequence  see table below              The table below shows the parameters of the fixed frequencies    10 1   10 8
148. d optional assembly       MMX34AA5D6N0 0                       series frequency inverter    3   Three phase input supply voltage   4   Rated voltage 400V   AA   Type of software version and display unit   506   5 6A  rated operational current    N   No integrated interference suppression filter  no filter   0   IP20 protection type      0   No integrated optional assembly             11  The input voltage of 115V is raised      230V  output voltage  through an internal  voltage double connection     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com              Series Overview    Technical Data and Specifications    General Rated Operational Data                            Description Symbols    Unit Specification  General  Standards ns   EMC  IEC EN 61800 3   Safety  IEC EN61800 5  UL508C  Certifications and manufacturer s         EMC  CE  CB  c Tick  declarations on conformity Safety  CE  CB  UL  cUL  Production quality         RoHS  1509 9001  Climatic proofing Pw    lt 95   average relative humidity  noncondensing  EN50178   Air quality  Chemical vapors                721 3 3  Device in operation  Class 302  Mechanical particles               721 3 3  Device in operation  Class 352       Ambient temperature  Operation 9   F    C  14  to 122     10   to 50                                  Storage    eF    C     40   to 158       40   to 70      Installation altitude H ft      0 3281 ft  0   1000m  above sea level  over 3281 ft  1000m  with 1 
149. d to the output terminals of the frequency  inverter  U T1  V T2  W T3  R       are not short circuited and  are not connected to ground  PE              5 The frequency inverter has been earthed properly  PE                    6 All electrical terminals in the power section  L1  L2 N  L3   U T1  V T2  W T3  R   R   PE  were implemented properly and  were designed in line with the corresponding requirements             7 Each single phase of the supply voltage  L1  L2  L3  is protected  with disconnect device             8 The frequency inverter and the motor are adapted to the input  voltage  see  Nameplate Rating Data on Page 6  connection  type  star  delta  of the motor tested              9 The quality and volume of cooling air are in line with the  environmental conditions required for the frequency inverter  and the motor                   10 All connected control lines comply with the corresponding stop  conditions  for example  switch in OFF position and setpoint  value   zero              11 The parameters that were preset at the factory have been  checked with the list of parameters  see  List of Parameters   on Page 161              12 The effective direction of a coupled machine will allow the  motor to start             13 All emergency switching off functions and safety functions are  in an appropriate condition                50 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Operational Hazard Warnings  Observe the followin
150. der to meet the requirements in accordance with  NEMA 1  IP21   you must  depending on the size of the  housing  use the optional housing accessories  MMX IP21 FS1  MMX IP21 FS2 or MMX IP21 FS3           The required installation instructions are shown in the setup  instructions         8230 2417     Mounting Position    Mounting Position  FS1 FS3             Z              590          x90            An installation that is turned by 180   stood on its head  is not  permitted        Mounting Position  FS4 and FS5     5302                        An installation that is turned by 180   stood on its head  is not  permitted     The vertical mounting position may be tilted by up to  30 degrees     26 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Cooling Measures   In order to guarantee sufficient air circulation  enough  thermal clearance must be ensured according to the frame  size  rating  of the frequency inverter    Air Cooling Space    A                     g  505                                     000000000                                            LA DASA    PV           LY  FAG                Minimum Clearance at the Front    N    Note  The frequency inverters of the M Max series are  air cooled with an internal fan     Minimum Clearance and Required Cooling Air       Installation    Note  Please note that the installation makes it possible to  open and close the control signal terminal covers  without any problems     Note  The pul
151. e  1 in   25 4 mm  1 mm   0 0394 in    150 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    PC Interface Card    MMX COM PC  Equipment Supplied MMX COM PC             1  MMX COM PC connection module  2  Instructional leaflet ILO4012004Z    3  CD with MaxConnect parameter software and driver  software    4  Connection cable with interface converter    Note  The MMX COM PC adapter is not supplied with the  M Max frequency inverter     The MMX COM PC PC connection module enables the  communication between the M Max frequency inverter and  a PC with the Windows operating system  point to point  connection   Together with the MaxConnect parameter  software  this enables you to     e Upload and download all parameters    e Store the parameters  compare them and print them in  parameter lists        Graphically show time sequences in the Monitor display   The oscillograms can be stored in the PC and printed out    The MMX COM PC interface module can be fitted and  connected without any tools required  The MMX COM PC    module is fitted on the front of the MMX frequency inverter     Appendix A    Fitting the MMX COM PC Connection Module                                     1  Remove the interface cover on the frequency inverter   do not discard     Fitting the MMX COM PC    3  Ready for operation    To remove  push in the two retaining clips on the side  The  connection module can then be pulled off from the front  see  step  1  in the figure below  
152. e 120   50 60 Hz at MMX11        230   50 Hz  EU  and 240V  60 Hz  USA  at MMX12         MMX32    e 400V  50 Hz  EU  and 480V  60 Hz  USA  at MMX34_  e 575V  50 Hz  EU  and 575V  60 Hz  USA  at MMX35    For the bottom voltage value  the permitted voltage drop of  496 in the consumer circuits is also taken into account     e 100V device class  MMX1 1    110V  15  to 120V  10   94V  0  to 132V  0          200  device class        12  MMX32    208V  15  to 240V  10   177V    096 to 264V  0      e 400V device class  MMX34    380V  15  to 480V  10   323V  0  to 528V  0      e 575V device class  MMX35    575V  15  to 575V  10   489V     096 to 632 5V  0                  The permitted frequency range is 50 60 Hz  45 Hz  0      66 Hz  0       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 19    Engineering    Voltage Balance    Because of the uneven loading on the conductor  and with  the direct connection of greater power ratings  deviations  from the ideal voltage form and asymmetrical voltages can  be caused in three phase AC power networks  These  asymmetric divergences in the input voltage can lead to  different loading of the diodes in input rectifiers with  three phase supplied frequency inverters  and as a result   an advance failure of this diode     In the project planning for the connection of three phase  supplied frequency inverters  MMX32  MMX34  MMX35    consider only AC power networks that handle permitted  asymmetric divergences in t
153. e control  pause  20   Counter  value 1 reached   21   Counter  value 2 reached   22   RUN message active   23   Analog min  reference error  24   LOG function fulfilled    25   PID controller  actual value  monitoring    26   External brake actuated  27   Current monitoring  28   Fieldbus  remote output                P13 2 1454 X rw LOG function  Selection    input B    Like P13 1 120 0       P13 3 1455 X rw LOG function  select    operation    0 AANDB 120 0  1           2 AXORB       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 175    Appendix       Second Parameter Set                                                                                                 Access  FS User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P14 1 347 X rw Motor rated current  2  5  0 2 x lg 2 x le 121 le   see motor rating plate   P14 2 352 X rw Current limit  2PS  0 2 x lg 2 x lg 121 1 5 xle  P14 3 350 X rw Motor rated speed  2PS  200    20000            121     see motor rating plate  P144 351 X rw Motor power factor  cos       2  5  0 30 1 00 121     see motor rating plate  P14 5 348 X rw Motor rated operating voltage  2985  180 500  121      see motor rating plate  P14 6 349 X rw Motor nominal frequency  2  5  30 320 Hz 121 60 00   see motor rating plate  P147 343 X rw Minimum frequency  2  5  0 00   14 8 Hz 121 0 00  P14 8 344 X rw Maximum frequency  2PS    14 7 320 00 Hz 121 60 00  P14 9 345 X rw Acceleration time  2  5   acc3  0 
154. e figure on Page 54 shows a good example of the  process  if the release signal  FWD REV  is switched on and  the maximum setpoint voltage     10V  is applied  The speed  of the motor follows the output frequency depending on the  load and moment of inertia  slip   from zero to Nmax     If the release signal  FWD  REV  is switched off during  operation  the inverter is blocked immediately  STOP   The  motor comes to an uncontrolled stop  see  1  in the figure on  Page 54      M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 53    Operation    Start Stop Command with Maximum Setpoint Value  Voltage  Acceleration Ramp 3s    FWD  REV     24V          P6 4    50 Hz             n    max                               P6 5    38 P6 8    0                As an alternative  OR  to operation via control signal  terminals  you can also operate the frequency inverter  without connecting the control signal terminals by simply  switching the control level and the setpoint value input     LOC REM button  LOC   local  keypad  KEYPAD        REM   remote  1 0  BUS     The following brief instructions indicate the required steps     Brief Instructions    The brief instructions  see the figure on Page 55  provide a  graphical description of the few steps necessary up to the  motor start         The frequency inverter carries out a self test when the  supply voltage is applied  The backlight of the LCD display  is switched on and all segments are briefly actuated  
155. e mounted on the cable clamp plate of the  power section     The control lines should be shielded and twisted  The  shielding is exposed on one side  PES   on the cable hold  down clamps on the frequency inverter for instance        Prevent the shielding from becoming unbraided  for example   by pushing the separated plastic covering over the end of the  shielding or with a rubber grommet on the end of the  shielding     R11 FWD REV    Prevent the Shield from Becoming Unbraided          As an alternative  in addition to a broad area cable clip  you  can also twist the shielding braid at the end and connect to  protective ground with a cable clip  To prevent EMC  disturbance  this twisted shielding connection should be  made as short as possible  see figure on Page 35      38 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Installation    Control Signal Terminals Arrangement and Connections  ESD Measures    A WARNING    Discharge yourself on a grounded surface before  touching the control signal terminals and the controller  PCB  This protects the device from destruction by  electrostatic discharge     The following figure shows the arrangement and designation of M Max control signal terminals     Control Signal Terminals Assignments and Designations                          GND 00 04 015 06      DO   R13 R14   R24  5 13 14 15 16 18 20 22 23 26                    O    OO  1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 25 24                                 OO O           
156. e permitted limit values of the motor     24 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Bypass Operation    If you want to have the option of operating the motor with  the frequency inverter or directly from the input supply  the  input branches must be interlocked mechanically        CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     A changeover between the frequency inverter and the input  supply must take place in a voltage free state          WARNING    The frequency inverter outputs  U  V  W  must not be  connected to the input voltage  destruction of the  device  risk of fire      Bypass Motor Control  Example     111213                                                             M1  Item  Number Description  1 Input bypass contactor  2 Output contactor       Engineering       CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     Switch S1 must switch only when frequency inverter T1 is at  zero current     Contactors and switches  S1  in the frequency inverter  output and for the direct start must be designed based on  utilization category AC 3 for the rated operational current of  the motor     Connecting EX Motors    Note the following when connecting explosion protected  motors       The frequency inverter must be installed outside the EX  area      Note the branch  and country specific standards for  explosion protected areas  ATEX 100a         Note the standards and infor
157. ec   The ID number of the written register is  2001  dec  as the master PLC has an offset of  1   0003 Content  2 bytes  for register 42101     0000 0000 0000 0011  bin   See anticlockwise  RUN    C2C8 CRC          Slave response  05 06 0700 0003 C8C2  hex     The slave response is a copy of the master request if it is a  normal response                 Hex Name   05 Slave address   06 Function code  here  Writing of a holding register    0700 2000  dec   The ID number of the first requested register  is 2001  dec  as the master PLC has an offset of  1   0003 Content  2 bytes  for register 42101     0000 0000 0000 0011  bin   See anticlockwise  RUN    C8C2 CRC          Function code 06  hex  can be used for broadcasting     Serial Interface  Modbus RTU     Function Code 10  hex   Writing of the Holding Registers    This function writes data to a number of consecutive holding  registers  of specified register addresses         CAUTION    Although the registers to be written are consecutive  the ID  numbers of the parameter list are not  Only the ID numbers  in the process data list are consecutive     Example     Writing of the control word  ID 2001  of the general control  word  ID 2002  and the speed setpoint  ID2003  of an MMX  frequency inverter with the slave address 5     Master request   05 10 0700 0003 06 0001 0000 2710 D125  hex                                   Hex Name  05 Slave address  10 Function code  here  Writing of the holding registers   07D0 2000  dec   The
158. ected with the                                       two arrow buttons              closed circuit  Example  Factory setting   oN REF ow  _    c MON 11         PAR  4          FLT    X        n              RES  FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS   ES READVe 2 RUN   STOP  ALARM FAULI                 vo                            4    PAR             FT     D E   FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS  READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT  4           2 Cc                 74                  4        I   The arrow buttons   lt  and  gt   enable you to select the first parameter of  isi   x each parameter group  J  FWD REV 1 0 KEYPAD BUS  gt  P1 1  P2 1  P3 1  P4 1        lt   4 1   3 1   2 1   1 1  P14 1       5 READY RUN By actuating the BACK RESET button  you exit main menu PAR  arrow            RESET wow     PAR  FLT          PE  INS    E    STOP ALARM FAULT  a 1    v       FWD REV    I O KEYPAD BUS    flashes  see sequence 1        All settings are stored automatically by actuating the OK button     Parameters marked in the  Access Right RUN    column with     can be changed during  operation  RUN mode      M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 63    Parameters    Parameter Menu  PAR     You have access to all M Max parameters in the parameter  menu  PAR   see  List of Parameters  on Page 161    Parameter Menu  P1 1   1  Quick Configuration     READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT    o D FE  PAR  4                               YO KEYPAD BUS    Y    Display in Automatic Alter
159. ed for power side  connections depend on the rated input current l  N of the  frequency inverter  without input reactor         CAUTION    When selecting the cable cross section  take the voltage  drop under load conditions into account     The consideration of other standards  for example  VDE 0113  or VDE 0289  is the responsibility of the user        The national and regional standards  for example VDE 01 13   EN 60204  must be observed and the necessary approvals   for example UL  at the site of installation must be fulfilled     When the device is operated in a UL approved system  use  only UL approved breakers  fuses  fuse bases  and cables     The leakage currents to ground  to EN 50178  are greater  than 3 5 mA  The connection terminals marked PE and the  housing must be connected with the ground circuit     The leakage currents for the individual performance variables  are listed on Page 142        CAUTION    The specified minimum PE conductor   EN 50178  VDE 0160  must be maintained     Choose the cross section of the PE conductor in the motor  lines at least as large as the cross section of the phase lines   U  V  W      cross sections    Cables and Fuses    The cross sections of the cables and line protection fuses  used must correspond with local standards     For an installation in accordance with UL guidelines  the  fuses and copper cable that are UL approved and have a  heat resistance of 140   to 167  F  60   to 75  C  are to be used     Use power cables with
160. ee phase AC voltage  Ug 3  AC   380 480   voltage  50 60 Hz frequency  input phase current  4 0A   Output Load side  motor  rating     Three phase AC voltage  0 06   output phase current  3 3A   output frequency  0 320 Hz        Power Assigned motor rating     1 1 kW at 400V 1 5 hp at 460V for a four pole internally cooled or surface cooled three phase asynchronous motor   1500            at 50 Hz 1800 RPM at 60 Hz                    S N Serial number  Frequency inverter is an electrical apparatus  15   Read the manual  in this case AWB8230 1603  before making any electrical connections and commissioning  IP 20          type Housing protection type  IP 20  UL  cUL    open type  12W10 Manufacturing date   Week 12 of 2010       6 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com              Series Overview    Catalog Number Selection  The type designation code and the part number of the M Max series frequency inverter are in    the following order     Type Designation of the M Max Frequency Inverters    MMX 1 1 AA 101          0     T                   Option  0  Full version          Description           Base catalog number                                                                                                                      Phase Enclosure Class  1  Single phase 0  NEMA 0 or IP20  3  Three phase 1  IP21 or NEMA 1  Voltage EMC Filter  1  120V   4  480V F  Filter  2  230V 5  575V N  No filter  Software Output Current  Designation S
161. ency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 155    Appendix       The mounting is carried out without tools at the corresponding cutouts in the housing  of the MMX  snap fitting   Plug and connection cable are then fitted to the interface of  the MMX  below the LCD display unit      Connecting the MMX NET XB Interface Module with the Fieldbus Interface Cards                         Note  Before installing the fieldbus interface card check whether the plug connection  provided  such as GND or bus terminal resistor have to be changed     e Fit the combination of MMX NET XB interface module and fieldbus interface  card and connect them    156 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    PROFIBUS DP Fieldbus Interface Card    Note  The PROFIBUS DP fieldbus interface card  XMX NET PD A or XMX NET PS A are not supplied  with the M Max frequency inverter     XMX NET PD A and XMX NET PS A enable the connection   slave  of frequency inverters of the M Max series to the  standard PROFIBUS DP fieldbus     Note  The optional MMX NET XA mounting frame is required  for mounting and connecting the MMX frequency  inverter    Technical data     e Communication protocol  PROFIdrive  PROFIBUS profile  for variable speed drives     e Data transfer  RS485  half duplex    Note  Further information on hardware and engineering the  XMX NET NET P  interface card is provided in the  manual     040120027     XMX NET PD A    The fieldbus connection is imple
162. ency of the  frequency inverter  resolution of the output frequency    0 01 Hz     Note  In this mode  multiple motors  with varying outputs  can  be connected in parallel in the output of the frequency inverter       Speed control with slip compensation  vector     The setpoint entry controls the motor speed depending on the  load torque  calculation by motor model     Note  In this mode  only one motor with the assigned power   current  may connected in the output of the frequency inverter    Note  The speed control requires a precise electrical  reproduction of the connected motor  The motor ratings  plate information must be set in the parameter group P7 in this  case       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 109    Parameters    On the constant three phase AC supply  the three phase  asynchronous motor has a constant rotor speed        P7 3   rating plate specifications  according to the number of pole  pairs and input frequency  The slip here represents the  difference between the rotating field of the stator and that of  the rotor  In static operation  the slip is constant     Load changes  1  at the motor shaft cause a larger slip  An   and thus a reduced rotor speed  2   In controlled operation   V f characteristic   the frequency inverter cannot  compensate this load related speed difference  The speed  behavior of the motor is even  as in a constant AC supply     Speed Behavior without Slip Compensation                  
163. ency setpoint  at speed   8 Motor controller active  9 Zero frequency  Output frequency   0 Hz  10 Frequency monitoring 1  For the frequency ranges set at P5 4 and P5 5  11 Frequency monitoring 2  For the frequency ranges set at P5 6 and P5 7  12 PID monitoring    For the deviation set at P9 17       Values continued on next page    78 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Digital Outputs  continued    Access    PNU ID RUN Value Range    Parameters    Factory Setting  Description  P1 3        P5 1 313 V 13    Overtemperature signal 2       Overcurrent control active       Overvoltage control active       PLC sequence control active       PLC sequence control  single step completed       PLC sequence control  program cycle completed          PLC sequence control  pause       Counter  value 1 reached  The counter value is   the trigger  value set at P3 21 and can be reset by activating P3 24       Counter  value 2 reached  The counter value is   the trigger  value set at P3 22 and can be reset by activating P3 24       22    RUN message active       23    Analog minimum reference error    Message if the setpoint signal  life zero  of AI1 and or AI2 is  below 4 mA  or 2V  P2 1   1  P2 5   1        24    LOG function fulfilled  Message if the logical operation of P13 3 is fulfilled  LOG   1        25    PID controller  actual value monitoring       essage if the actual value is within the hysteresis set at P9 15  and P9 16       26   
164. equency  This requires that the output current of the  frequency inverter be monitored  A message will be generated  if the values set in P8 12 and P8 13 are undershot within  20 seconds  0 Deactivated  1 Alarm  AL 17   2 Fault  F   17   stop function according to P6 8  P8 6 704    Motor  temperature protection 2  The motor temperature protection is designed to protect the  motor from overheating  It is based on a temperature algorithm  and uses the motor current  P7 1  to determine the motor load   see figure on Page 92   0 Deactivated  1 Alarm  AL 16   2 Fault  F    16   stop function according to P6 8  P8 7 705     Motor  ambient temperature 40   209 to 100  C      P8 8 706     Motor  cooling factor at zero frequency 40 0  0 0 15096 The cooling factor of the motor with a zero frequency defines  the relationship to the cooling of the motor at the rated  frequency with the rated operational current without an external  fan  see figure on Page 92   P8 9 707     Motor  thermal time constant 45  1 200 min The temperature time constant determines the time span in    which the heat calculation model achieves 6396 of its end value   It depends on the design of the motor and is different from  manufacturer to manufacturer  The larger the motor design   the greater the time constant       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive     04020003                 2013 www eaton com 91    Parameters    Motor Heat Protection  P8 6   P8 9     The motor temperature protection is based on a cal
165. eration and Deceleration Ramps    fh          P6 4 P6 4                            P6 3                      P6 3                                                             P6 9 P6 9 P6 9    P6 9                                        84 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Parameters    Drives Control  continued          Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P6 10 717 X     REAF  Wait time before an automatic restart 0 50  0 10 10 00s Active  if P6 13   1 and P3 1   0    Waiting time until automatic restart  after the detected  error has disappeared     REAF   Restart After Failure   P6 11 718 X     REAF  Testing period over automatic restarts 30 00    0 00 60 008 Active  if P6 13   1    Timed monitoring of the automatic restart   The monitoring time begins with the first automatic restart    If more than three error messages occur during the testing  period  fault status is activated  Otherwise  the error is  acknowledged after the test time has elapsed and the test  time is only started again with the next error  The number of  fault occurrences before a fault is indicated is defined by P6 30                                     P6 12 719 X     REAF  Start function with automatic restart 0  0 Ramp  acceleration   1 Flying restart circuit  2 According to P6 7   P6 13 731 X     REAF  automatic restart after an error message 0  0 Deactivated  1 Activated   P6 14 1600 V     Stop on direction change via
166. eries 106   1 6A       010   10A                         M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com              Series Overview    Examples  Label    MMX11AA2D8N0 0             M Max series frequency inverter    1   Single phase power supply   1   Rated voltage 115V   AA   Type of software version and display unit   2D8   2 8A  rated operational current         No integrated interference suppression filter  no filter   0   IP20 protection type      0   No integrated optional assembly       MMX12AA1D7F0 0             M Max series frequency inverter    1   Single phase power supply   2   Rated voltage 230V   AA   Type of software version and display unit  107   1 7A  rated operational current    F   Integrated radio noise filter   0   IP20 protection type      0   No integrated optional assembly       MMX32AA2D4N0 0             M Max series frequency inverter    3   Three phase input supply voltage   2   Rated voltage 230V   AA   Type of software version and display unit   204   244A  rated operational current    N   No integrated interference suppression filter  no filter   0   IP20 protection type      0   No integrated optional assembly          MMX34AA012F0 0             M Max series frequency inverter    3   Three phase input supply voltage   4   Rated voltage 400V   AA   Type of software version and display unit  012   12A  rated operational current    F   Integrated radio noise filter   0   IP20 protection type      0   No integrate
167. evices  repair and maintenance  Switches  on the motor side must never be opened while the  motor is in operation when the frequency inverter is set to  speed control operating mode  P11 8   1      Inching operation of the motor with contactors and switching  devices in the output of the frequency inverter is not  permitted        CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram    Make sure that there is no danger in starting the motor   Disconnect the driven machine if there is a danger in an  incorrect operational status     Note  The START button is only functional if the KEYPAD  operating mode is activated        The STOP button is active in all operating modes  It  can be deactivated with parameter  P6 16   0      Note  Operating ranges must be approved by the motor  manufacturer if motors are to be operated with  frequencies higher than the standard 50 or 60 Hz   otherwise the motors could be damaged     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 51    Operation    Commissioning with Control Signal Terminals   Factory Setting    M Max frequency inverters are set in the factory and can be  started directly via the control signal terminals by connecting  the motor outputs allocated for the input voltage  see  connection example below      You can skip this section if you want to set up the  parameters directly for optimal operation of the frequency  inverter based on the motor data  rating plate  and the  ap
168. f  the  output frequency of the frequency inverter can be reduced  according to the deceleration time  dec1  set at P6 6     The second parameter set  2PS  enables you to set at P14 10  a different value to dec1 or dec2  For example  the second  parameter set  P14  is activated here via digital input DI6   P3 27   6   Activating DI6 causes the output frequency to be  reduced according to the deceleration time  dec3  set at    P14 10    A CAUTION  Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     The motor parameters must be identical in both parameter  groups  P7 and P14      Digital input 6 is assigned in the factory setting  P3 12   6   with the function PI OFF  PID controller  deactivated   With  P3 12   0 you can remove this function  PI OFF  from digital  input 6     124 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Parameters    System Parameter  The system parameters  S parameters  inform the user of device specific settings     The S parameters are not visible  i e  hidden   as long as you have activated the quick start  assistant  P1 1   1  see  Parameter Menu  PAR   on Page 64      System Parameter                            Access Factory Setting   PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3    Hard  and Software Information    1 1 833 X      API SW ID  control section software ID        51 2 834 X          SW Version  control section software version       S1 3 835 X    Power SW ID  power section software ID    
169. f motor or adjustable frequency drive  may cause the failure of the device and may lead to  serious injury or damage    The applicable national accident prevention and safety  regulations apply to all work carried out on live adjustable  frequency drives    The electrical installation must be carried out in  accordance with the relevant regulations  for example   with regard to cable cross sections  fuses  PE        Transport  installation  commissioning  and maintenance  work must be carried out only by qualified personnel   IEC 60364  HD 384 and national occupational safety  regulations     Installations containing adjustable frequency drives must  be provided with additional monitoring and protective  devices in accordance with the applicable safety  regulations  Modifications to the adjustable frequency  drives using the operating software are permitted    All covers and doors must be kept closed during operation    To reduce hazards for people or equipment  the user must  include in the machine design measures that restrict the  consequences of a malfunction or failure of the drive   increased motor speed or sudden standstill of motor    These measures include     e Other independent devices for monitoring safety related  variables  speed  travel  end positions  and so on     e Electrical or non electrical system wide measures   electrical or mechanical interlocks     e Never touch live parts or cable connections of the  adjustable frequency drive after it has been  disc
170. fferent from  manufacturer to manufacturer  The larger the motor design  the  greater the time constant       122    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    The following examples show two practical applications for  the second parameter set     Example 1  Roller conveyor with rotary table     e Motor M1  0 75 kW  drives the rollers on the rotary table  and transports the goods further        Motor   2  1 5 kW  rotates the table for the alternating  acceptance of goods from two feed lines    Roller Conveyor with Rotary Table                                                                                                                                                                                                                   For alternating operation  rotary movement  exclusive or  of  the transport rollers  on the rotary table  a frequency inverter  for the largest connected load  MMX34AA4D3_  was  selected     The different rating data of the motors were set in the  parameter groups P7  for motor M1  and P14  for motor M2    The second parameter set  P14  is activated here as an  example via digital input DI6  P3 27   6      The change between the two motors is implemented in this  example via contactors Q11  M1  and Q12  M2  at standstill   The enabling and selection of the relevant parameter group is  activated via the digital inputs     e Motor M1   DI1  FWD  control signal terminal 8  operation  with parameter group P7  
171. frequency 6 0       1 5 16 0 kHz Using a high switching frequency can reduce the magnetization  noise in the motor    The heat dissipation in the inverter  IGBT  increases with higher  Switching frequencies    With motor frequencies   5 Hz a higher speed stability can be  achieved at low switching frequencies    Note  As a protection against thermal overload  MMX reduces  the switching frequency automatically if  for example  too high  values are set and with high ambient temperatures and high  load currents    Parameter P11 10 2 1 must be set for operation at a constant  carrier frequency             P11 10 522 X     Sine wave filter  constant carrier frequency  0  0 Deactivated  1 Enabled    Note  When using a sinusoidal filter  the carrier frequency must  be constant       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013  www eaton com 111    Parameters    Braking  P12   In parameter group P12 you can set different brake functions         DC braking  e Generative braking  brake chopper     e Mechanical braking  actuation     The brake functions allow you to reduce undesired coasting  and long coasting times  Mechanical braking also ensures  safe operating states     DC Braking    With DC braking  the frequency inverter supplies the  three phase stator winding of the three phase motor with  DC current  This generates a stationary magnetic field which  in turn induces voltage in the rotor while the rotor is in  motion  As the electrical resistance of the ro
172. g Warnings and Cautions     A WARNING    Commissioning is only to be completed by qualified  technicians     A WARNING    Hazardous voltage     The safety instructions on Page x must be followed     A WARNING    The components in the frequency inverter s power  section are energized if the supply voltage  line voltage   is connected  For instance  power terminals L1  L2 N  L3        R   U T1  V T2  W T3     The control signal terminals are isolated from the line  power potential     There can be a dangerous voltage on the relay terminals   22 to 26  even if the frequency inverter is not being  supplied with line voltage  for example  integration of  relay contacts in control systems with 230 Vac      A WARNING    The components in the frequency inverter s power  section remain energized up to five  5  minutes after the  supply voltage has been switched off  intermediate  circuit capacitor discharging time      Pay attention to hazard warnings             DANGER    5 MIN    A WARNING    Following a shutdown  fault  line voltage off   the motor  can start automatically  when the supply voltage is  switched back on  if the automatic restart function has  been enabled      See parameter  P6 13       Operation       CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     Any contactors and switching devices on the power side are  not to be opened during motor operation  Inching operation  using the power switch is not permitted     Contactors and switching d
173. handling  and when operating the frequency inverter  if the frequency  inverter is not grounded  because of a fault      Leakage currents to ground are mainly caused by foreign  capacities with frequency inverters  between the motor  phases and the shielding of the motor cable and via the  Y capacitors of the noise filter  The size of the leakage  current is mainly dependent upon the     e length of the motor cable  e shielding of the motor cable       height of the pulse frequency  switching frequency of the  inverter     e design of the noise filter    e grounding measures at the site of the motor    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013  www eaton com 21    Engineering    The leakage current to ground is greater than 3 5 mA with a  frequency inverter  Based on the requirements of EN 50178   an increased ground  PE  has to be connected  The cable  cross section must be at least 10 mm  or consist of two  separately connected ground cables     Residual current circuit breakers must be suitable for        the protection of installations with DC current component  in case of fault scenario  RCD type B     e high leakage currents  300 mA     e brief discharges of pulse current spikes    Input Contactor    The input contactor enables an operational switching on and  off of the supply voltage for the frequency inverter  and  switching off in case of a fault     The input contactor is designed based on the input current   Ij N  of the frequency inverter
174. he input voltage   3      If this condition is not fulfilled  or symmetry at the connection  location is not known  the use of an assigned main choke is  recommended     Total Harmonic Distortion  THD     The THD  Total Harmonic Distortion  is a measurement for  the occurring harmonic distortion of the sinusoidal oscillation   input power side  input variables with the frequency  inverter  It is given in percent of the total value        2 2 2  U5  05   U                    5 5 2 5   100   050 504 509        U    94   fundamental component  THD     0 1     K   10     20 dB  THD suppression        2  12   Ux       Tot 9   0       THD    1    With M Max series frequency inverters  the permitted value  for the total harmonic distortion THD is   12096     Idle Power Compensation Devices    Compensation on the power supply side is not required for  M Max series frequency inverters  From the AC power  supply network  they take on very little reactive power of the  fundamental harmonics  cos      0 98      In the AC power networks with non choked idle current  compensation devices  current deviations can enable parallel  resonance and undefinable circumstances     In the project planning for the connection of frequency  inverters to AC power networks with undefined  circumstances  consider using main chokes     Input Reactors    A input reactor  also called commutation inductor  increases  the inductance of the power supply line  This extends the  current flow period and dampens inp
175. he parameter number  M1 1  and the  respective display value  0 00  are then displayed automatically in alternating sequence     Operational Data Indicator                READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT                  REF                               von  4          lt   Display in automatic     gt  von  4                 PAR  1        PAR  LI  LL     il FLT  Hz     w 77  w w  FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS i FWD REV I O KEYPAD BUS         You can use the MON  Monitor  menu level to select the desired operational data indicator   parameter number      with the arrow buttons   and v  The parameter number and the  display value are shown in alternation automatically  and the display can be fixed on the  selected display value with the OK button  If you wish to access a different operational data  indicator  press the OK button once again  You can then make the selection with the arrow  buttons   and  v and confirm with the OK button  The appropriate unit is shown under the  respective operational data indicator     The values of the operating data display cannot be changed by hand  i e  by value entry      You can select operational data indicators during operation  RUN      Operational Data Indicator                                              Display   PNU ID Designation Value Unit Description   M1 1 1 Output frequency 0 00 Hz Frequency to motor   M1 2 25 Frequency reference value 0 00 Hz Frequency reference value   M1 3 2 Motor shaft speed 0 RPM Calculated
176. ically grounded TN networks  phase grounded  Delta network  Grounded Delta   USA  or non grounded or  high resistance grounded  over 30 ohms  IT networks is only  conditionally permissible     If the M Max frequency inverters are connected to an  asymmetrically grounded network or to an IT network   non grounded  insulated   the internal interference  suppression filter must be disconnected  unscrew the screw  marked EMC  see  Electrical Installation  on Page 32   The  required filtering for electromagnetic compatibility  EMC  is  then no longer present        Measures for electromagnetic compatibility are mandatory in  a drive system in order to meet the legal requirements for  EMC and low voltage regulations     Good grounding measures are a prerequisite for the effective  insert of further measures such as shielding or filters   Without respective grounding measures  further steps are  superfluous     Engineering    Input Voltage and Frequency    The standardized input voltages  IEC 60038  VDE017 1  for  energy suppliers  EVU  guarantee the following conditions at  the transition points     e Deviation from the rated value of voltage  maximum  10       Deviation in voltage phase balance  maximum  3           Deviation from rated value of the frequency   maximum  4     The broad tolerance band of the M Max frequency inverter  considers the rated value for   European as  EU  U  N   230V 400V  50 Hz           American as  USA  Ui      240V 480V  60 Hz  standard  voltages     
177. ignal  V mA  in the limit value  range  highest limit value     See  Scaled Value Range     1  AI2   on Page 69       P2 4 378 V      AM  filter time    0 1       0 0      filter function       0 1 10s    Filter time constant for the analog input signal  V mA     See    Filter Time Constant  on Page 70       68 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Analog Inputs  continued    Access    PNU ID RUN Value Range Description    Parameters    Factory Setting   P1 3        P2 5 390 V      Al2 signal range  analog input  1       Depending on the switch position of microswitch S3   FS   PID controller  actual value        0 S3   V  0 10V  voltage signal  53   mA  0 20 mA  current signal       1 With live zero     S3   V  2 10V  voltage signal  S3   mA  4 20 mA  current signal  FS  see P9 6     At P8 1 it is possible to set the response of the MMX  to a setpoint error  live zero        P2 6 391 V        AI2 custom minimum 0 00       Like P2 2           P2 7 392 V        12 custom maximum    100 00       Like P2 3           P2 8 389 V            2  filter time    0 1       Like P2 4           Scaled Value Range        Al2     The following graphs show examples of the curve  characteristics of the scaled and non scaled input signals     Example A  P2 2  P2 6    3096  P2 3  P2 7    8096    The incoming analog input signal 0 10    4 20 mA  is used  here in the selected range from 30 to 8096  This limited  signal range is predefined as 0 100  in
178. imary side    Number of phases Three phase   Rated voltage UIN V 380  15  480   10   50 60 Hz    323 528     096  45 66 Hz 4096    Input current         22 28 3 2 4 5 6 7 3 9 6  Maximum leakage current to  ground  PE  without motor   MMX34   N               MMX34   F IPE mA 45 1 45 1 45 1 25 1 25 1 25 1 24 9  Braking torque   Default         30  30  30  30  30 5530 5530   Brake chopper with external     m      Max  100  rated operational current    with   braking resistance external braking resistance   Minimum braking resistance Rg ohms             75 75 75 54   Switch on threshold for the Upc                 Programmable P12 6   braking transistor   DC braking lp   55100  adjustable  Pulse frequency   PWM kHz 6  adjustable 1   16   Heat dissipation at rated Py      217 29 7 31 7 51 5 66 4 88 3 116 9  operational current  la   Ffficiency h 0 94 0 95 0 95 0 95 0 96 0 96 0 96  Fan  device internal  V V                      temperature controlled   Installation size FS1 FS1 FS1 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS3  Weight m Lbs 12 12 121 15 15 15 2 2    kg   0 55   0 55  0 55   0 7   0 7   0 7   0 99    Notes       Symbols used in technical data and formulas   G Guide value  calculated   no standard rating     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    145    Appendix       Device Series MMX34  continued                               MMX34AA   F0 0 Symbols    Unit   900 012 014 016 023 031 038  Rated operational current  12  le A 9 12 14 16 23 31 38  Overloa
179. imum 250 Vac 2A or 250 Vdc 0 4A   Parameter P5 1        Relay RO2  changeover contact  control signal terminal    Parameters    Mechanical Brake    f                         12 9                  12 8                                                 25  R21   24  R22         26  R24   maximum 250        2        RUN  250 Vdc 0 4A  Parameter P5 2               01  R02  DO                 26       1 2                       Description  1 Brake  released  2 Brake activates and brakes the drive mechanically  Braking  continued  Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P12 7 1448 X    External brake  delay time opening 0 2  0 00 320 00s Condition  RUN  Start enable   After the time set here has elapsed  the brake is actuated   P5  is opened   P12 8 1449 X    External brake  frequency threshold opening 1 50  0 00 P6 4 Hz Condition  RUN  Start enable   If the frequency set here is exceeded  the brake is actuated   P5  is opened   P12 9 1450 X     External brake  frequency threshold closing 1 50  0 00 P6 4 Hz If the frequency goes below the value set here  the brake is  actuated  Pb  is closed   P12 10 1451 X     External brake  frequency threshold REV closing 1 50  0 00 P6 4Hz      P12 11 1452 X    External brake  current limit  opening 0 00  0 00 P7 2A Condition  RUN  Start enable     On reaching the current value set here  the brake is actuated     P5  is opened        M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 117    
180. in line power  03 Ground fault An additional leakage current was detected when Check the motor cable and the motor  starting by means of a current measurement  Insulation fault in the cables or in the motor  08 System fault CPU error message Reset error  Switch input voltage off and on  restart      Internal communication fault If the fault occurs again  contact your local representative  09 Undervoltage The DC intermediate circuit voltage has exceeded If a brief power failure takes place  reset the fault and restart  the internal safety limit the frequency inverter  Probable cause  Check the supply voltage  If it is okay  there is an internal fault  The supply voltage is too low If this is the case  contact your local representative  nternal device fault  Power failure  13 Undertemperature The IGBT switch temperature is below 14  F   10  C  Check the ambient temperature  14   Overtemperature The IGBT switch temperature is above 248 F  120 C  Make sure that there is an unobstructed flow of cooling air  An excessive temperature warning is issued if the Check the ambient temperature  IGBT switch temperature goes above 230  F  110  C  Make sure that the switching frequency is not too high in  relation to the ambient temperature and to the motor load  15 Motor stalled The motor blocking protection mechanism has been Check the motor  triggered  16 Motor The frequency inverter s motor temperature model Decrease the motor load  overtemperature has detected motor overheating  The mot
181. inding of the motor is connected in a  delta circuit  motor rated current 4A as per  nameplate in figure on this page    Required changes for the electrical reproduction  for the motor  P7 1   4 0  P7 3   1410  P7 4    0 67     88 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Parameters                                           Motor  Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P7 1 113 X     Motor  rated operational current le  0 2xle 2xle  A  le   Frequency inverter s rated operational current   See figure on Page 88    P7 2 107 X     Current limit 1 5 x le  0 2 x l    2 x l     A  Factory setting  1 5 x le  P7 3 112 X     Motor  rated speed 1720  300 20000 RPM  See figure on Page 88              1     7 4 120 X     Motor  power factor  cos     0 85  0 30 1 00  See figure on Page 88    P7 5 110 X     Motor  rated operating voltage     180 676V  See figure on Page 88    Pay attention to the supply voltage and the type of  circuit in the stator winding  P7 6 111 X    Motor  rated frequency 60 00  30 320 Hz  See figure on Page 88    Note       Default values vary based on actual unit ratings     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 89    Parameters    Protective Functions  P8     In parameter group P8  you can set the reaction of the frequency inverter to external  influences and increase the protection to the drive system  PDS      e 0   deactivated  no reaction  e 1   Ala
182. k start parameters 1  0 All parameters  All parameters are shown and can be changed  Exit from Quickstart   1 Only quick configuration parameters  Only the selected parameters of the quick configuration are shown and can  be changed  see Page 66 for list of parameters   P1 2 540 X     Application 0   See listing of the predefined application parameters in the table on  Page 66   0 Basic  1 Pump drive  2 Fan drive  3 High load  for example  hoisting or conveyor   P1 3 1472 X   Country specific default settings 1  0 EU  Europe  50 Hz networks   1 NA  North America  60 Hz networks           The country specific factory setting takes into account the frequency                                           based parameters in relation to 50 and 60 Hz networks   PNU Designation P1 3 0   13 1    6 4 Maximum frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz  P7 3 Motor  rated speed 1440 RPM 1720 RPM  P7 6 Motor  rated frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz  P11 2 Cut off frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz  P11 4 V Hz characteristic curve  mean 25 Hz 30 Hz  frequency value  P14 3 Motor  2PS  nominal speed 1440        1720 RPM  P14 6 Motor  2  5  nominal frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz  P14 8 Maximum frequency  2PS  50 Hz 60 Hz             M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 67    Parameters    Analog Input  P2   In parameter group P2  you can adapt the analog inputs     The signal range depends on the switch position of the  microswitches  see figure on this page      e 52   V  All  control signal terminal 2   
183. lave address 1 255 125 1  S240 811 V rw Baud rate 0   300 125 5   1  600   2  1200   3   2400   4   4800   5   9600   6   19200   7   38400   8   57600  52 6 813 V rw Parity type 0 None  no  see 2 stop bits 126 0   1   Even  see 1 stop bit   2   Odd  see 1 stop bit  52 7 814      rw Communication timeout 0   Not used 126 0   1 18   2 2s      255   up to 255s   2 8 815 V rw Reset communication status 0   Not used 126 0    1   Resets parameter 52 1       Note       These parameters are overwritten with the bus specific parameters when a fieldbus connection  for example  CANopen  is used   The parameter values described in the manual of the fieldbus interface then apply     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 177    Appendix       System Parameters  continued                                        Access  FS User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  Unit Counter  531 827    ro MWh counter MWh 126       3 2 828 X ro Operating days  d  0   0000 days 126      53 3 829 X ro Operating hours  h  0   24 h 126       3 4 840 X ro RUN counter  days 0   0000 days 126      53 5 841    ro RUN counter  hours 0 24 h 126     3 6 842 X ro Fault alarm counter Trip counter  0   0000 126      User Set   4 1 830 V rw Display contrast 0 15 126 7   4 2 831 X rw Restore factory defaults 0   Factory setting or changed value 126 0  1   Restores factory settings for all  parameters   4 3 832      ro Password 0000   9999 126 0000  178 M
184. le   7 No action Overwrite setpoint with 0  8      action Control level   Fieldbus  overwrite value from P6 8   9      action Setpoint input   Fieldbus  overwrite value from P6 8   10 Not used      11 Not used    12      action The inverter is blocked and the drive stops as quickly as possible   an edge is required for restart   13 No action Control of a digital output   P5 1   28  Relay R01   P5 2   28  Relay R02   P5 3   28  Transistor DO   14 Not used      15 Not used         M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    137    Serial Interface  Modbus RTU     General Control Word  ID 2002        15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3       NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB NB    NB NB NB       Speed Setpoint  ID 2003  Frequency Setpoint    The permitted value range lies between 0 and 10 000  In the application  this value is scaled  to a percentage in the frequency range between the defined minimum and maximum  frequencies                                                                                15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  MSB LSB  Output Process Data   The output process data is used to monitor the frequency inverter    ID Modbus Register Designation Value Range Type   2101 32101  42101 Fieldbus status word     Binary code   2102 32102  42102 Fieldbus general status word     Binary code   2103 32103  42103 Fieldbus actual speed 0 01 96   2104 32104  42104 Motor frequency 0 01       7   2105 32105  42105 Motor speed 1 4    
185. le   Efficiency h 97 6 97 6           Fan  device internal  V                      temperature controlled   Installation size FS3 FS3 FS3 FS3 FS3  Weight m Lbs  kg  2 2  0 99  2 2  0 99  2 2  0 99  2 2  0 99  2 2  0 99   Notes       Symbols used in technical data and formulas      Contact the Eaton Drives Technical Resource Center for technical data     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    147    Appendix       Dimensions and Frame Sizes  Approximate Dimensions in inches  mm     Dimensions and Frame Sizes  FS1 FS3  FS   Frame Size     a       a1                                                                                                                                                              OOOOO                                        FS1  FS2  0 28 in   7 mm   N  2     1                  1                                                                          OOOOO          FS3                  148 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com       b1  b          Approximate Dimensions in inches  mm     Dimensions and Frame Sizes  FS4 and FS5  FS   Frame Size     a                                                                                                                               a1                gt        1      0        3 1  1            9  oOo                                   Y  Noo o of             01    02    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   Octo
186. le clip  To prevent  EMC disturbance  this twisted shielding connection should  be made as short as possible  see figure below      Screened Connection Cable                  PES     Shielded  four wire cable is recommended for the motor  cables  The green yellow line of this cable connects the  protective ground connections from the motor and the  frequency inverter and therefore minimizes the equalizing  current loads on the shielding braid     Connection with Twisted Cable Shielding   Recommended value for twisted cable shielding  b  1 5 a           Twisted shielding braid should be connected with a ring  cable terminal  see figure on Page 33  on PES     The following figure shows the construction of a four wire   shielded motor line  recommended specifications      M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Installation    Four Core Shielded Motor Supply Cable                                            Description   1 Cu shield braid   2 PVC outer sheath   3 Drain wire  copper strands    4 PVC core insulation  3 x black  1 x green yellow  5 Textile and PVC fillers       If there are additional subassemblies in a motor circuit  for  example  motor contactors  relays  motor reactor  sinusoidal  filters  or terminals   interrupt the shielding of the motor  cable in the vicinity of these subassemblies  Connect this  over a broad surface area with the mounting plate  PES    Free or non shielded connection cables should not be any  longe
187. le cross sections   3 Protection of persons and domestic animals with  residual current protective devices   4 Input contactor  Input line reactor  radio interference suppression filter   input filters   6 Frequency inverter  mounting  installation  power connection   EMC measures  circuit examples   7 Motor reactor  dv dt filter  sine wave filter  Motor protection  thermistor  Cable lengths  motor cables  shielding  EMC    Y 10 Motor and application  parallel operation of multiple motors   on a frequency inverter  bypass circuit  DC braking   11 Braking resistance  dynamic braking                                                                            18 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Electrical Power Network    Input Connection and Configuration   The M Max series frequency inverters can be connected and  operated with all control point grounded AC power networks   see IEC 60364 for more information      AC Power Networks with Grounded Center Point   TN  TT Networks                        YY 11        L1         12       12   LENY L3       L3  N PEN  PE       While planning the project  consider a symmetrical  distribution to the three external conductors  if multiple  frequency inverters with single phase supplies are to be  connected  The total current of all single phase consumers is  not to cause an overload of the neutral conductor   N conductor      The connection and operation of frequency inverters to  asymmetr
188. lection for the menu  levels   lt q flashes           0    REM          Move between different control levels   I O   KEYPAD BUS  according to  parameter settings P6 1 and P6 17       Select function and parameter  Increase numerical value       Confirm and activate selection  store   Lock display       Select function and parameter  Reduce numerical value       Move to the individual parameter groups       S4 1 P1 1 P2 1 P3 1        In displays with several digits  move  between the individual digits  cursor   Direction reversal  FWD  lt     gt  REV  in  KEYPAD mode                Stops the running motor  P6 16    Reset  Holding down the button for   5 seconds causes the default settings to  be loaded  All parameters are reset and  the fault memory  FLT  is cleared                Motor start with selected direction of  rotation  only active in KEYPAD control  level             9omA  qgqeb    Interface for communication  Option   MMX COM PC        Pressing the arrow buttons increases or decreases the active  value  the parameter  or function by one unit  Holding down    an arrow button makes the    aub       change automatically     q       60 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Display Unit    The following shows the display unit  LCD display with all  display elements      LCD Display  Areas        READY   RUN STOP ALARM FAULT                 A     CU nm n nna 1            UN IM DILDO       mAV 5   k Hz  C  F rpm MkWh        F
189. ls   Contact your local Eaton distributor or sales office     M Max Series Overview    Service and Warranty  In the unlikely event that you have a problem with your  M Max frequency inverter  please contact Eaton Care  Customer Support Center at 877 ETN CARE  877 386 2273    option 2  option 6  option 3  or email  VFDaftermarketEG eaton com     When you call  have the following information ready   e the exact frequency inverter part no   see nameplate     the date of purchase    e a detailed description of the problem that has occurred  with the frequency inverter    If some of the information printed on the nameplate is not  legible  please state only the information that is clearly  legible  This information can also be found under the cover of  the control terminals     Information concerning the guarantee can be found in the  Eaton General Terms and Conditions of Sale     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 17    Engineering    Engineering    Introduction    This chapter describes the most important features in the energy circuit of a drive system   PDS   Power Drive System  that you should take into consideration in your project planning     Drive System  PDS     L1                                                                                                          i5 Item  Number Description  PE 1 Network configuration  input voltage  input frequency    interaction with p f  correction systems   2 Breakers  fuses  and cab
190. lt  stop according      P6 8  P8 2 72  X rw Undervoltage error Like P8  90 2  P8 3 703 X rw Ground fault Like P8  90 2  P8 4 709 X rw Stall protection Like P8  91 1  P8 5 713 X rw Underload protection Like P8  91 0  P8 6 704 X rw Motor  temperature protection Like P8  91 2  P8 7 705 X rw Motor  ambient temperature    20   to 100  C 91 40  P8 8 706 X rw Motor  cooling factor at 0 0 15096 91 40  zero frequency  P8 9 707 X rw Motor  thermal time constant 1 200 min 91 45  P8 10 1430 X rw Analog minimum reference error  0 0 10 08 93 0 5  reaction time  P8 11 1473 X      Not used               P8 12 714 X rw Underload low torque limit 10 0 15096 93 60 0    8 13 715 X rw Underload  low torque limit at 10 0 15096 93 10 0  zero frequency  P8 14 733 X rw Fieldbus error Like P8 1 94 2  P8 15 734 X rw Fieldbus interface error Like P8 1 94 2  Note       Factory settings dependent on specific drive selected     170 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Appendix                                                                                                                            PID Controller  A  und FS User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P9 1 163 V rw PID controller 0   Deactivated 95 0  1   Activated for drive control  2   Activated for external application  P9 2 118      rw PID controllers  P gain 0 0 1000 096 95 100 0  P9 3 119 V rw PID controller    reset time 0 00   320 00s 95 10 00  P9 4 167 V rw PID c
191. lved  Any necessary crossed  cabling between the control signal and power cables should  always be implemented at right angles  90 degrees            Never lay control or signal cables in the same duct as power  cables  Analog signal cables  measured  reference and  correction values  must be shielded     Earthing    The ground connection  PE  in the cabinet should be  connected from the input supply to a central earth point   mounting plate   All protective conductors should be routed  in star formation from this earth point and all conductive  components of the PDS  frequency inverter  motor reactor   motor filter  main choke  are to be connected     Avoid ground loops when installing multiple frequency  inverters in one cabinet  Make sure that all metallic devices  that are to be grounded have a broad area connection with  the mounting plate     Screen Earth Kit    Cables that are not shielded work like antennas  sending   receiving   Make sure that any cables that may carry  disruptive signals  for example  motor cables  and sensitive  cables  analog signal and measurement values  are shielded  apart from one another with EMC compatible connections     The effectiveness of the cable shield depends on a good  shield connection and a low shield impedance     Use only shields with tinned or nickel plated copper braiding   Braided steel shields are unsuitable     Control and signal lines  analog  digital  should always be  grounded on one end  in the immediate vicinity of the
192. mation of the motor  manufacturer regarding operation on frequency inverters     for example  if motor reactors  du dt limiting  or sinus  filters are specified      Temperature monitors in the motor windings  thermistor   thermo Click  are not to be connected directly to frequency  inverters but must be connected via an approved trigger  apparatus for EX areas    Sinusoidal Filter    Sinusoidal filters are connected in the output of the  frequency inverter  They allow the use of long motor cables  with reduced conducted and radiated emission     The upstream sinusoidal filter enables the reduction of  losses and noise in the motor     Disadvantage  Sinusoidal filters have a system voltage drop  of around 30V per phase     Note  Sinusoidal filters must only be used with permanently  set pulse frequencies     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 25    Installation    Installation    Introduction    This chapter provides a description of the installation and the  electrical connections for the frequency inverter M Max series     While installing and or assembling the frequency inverter   cover all ventilation slots in order to ensure that no foreign  bodies can enter the device     Perform all installation work with the specified tools and  without the use of excessive force     Installation Instructions    The instructions for installation in this manual apply for M Max  series frequency inverters under protection type IP20     In or
193. mented with a nine pole  Sub D plug connector     XMX NET PD A PROFIBUS DP Fieldbus Interface Card  with Nine Pole Sub D Plug Connection        fA  3    L21        RxD TxD P  B B    8          RxD TxD N  A A   5           GND  VP    b    6  41            VP   5       Note  Detailed installation instructions are provided in  110401200827     Appendix                       5       The fieldbus connection is implemented with    pluggable  five pole screw terminal     Fieldbus Connection                                  XMX NET PS A  E 1 1   3  N 3                       RxD TXD P          ba 4 4  RxD TxD N  A A   ha                 GND  VP              VP  45 V              Note  Detailed installation instructions are provided in  11040120087     XMX NET DN A    XMX NET DN A DeviceNet Fieldbus Interface Card       Note  The DeviceNet fieldbus internet card XMX NET DN A  is not supplied with the M Max frequency inverter     The XMX NET DN A enables the connection  slave  of  frequency inverters of the M Max series to the standard  DeviceNet fieldbus        Note  The optional MMX NET XA mounting frame is required  for mounting and connecting the M Max frequency    inverter     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive     04020003                 2013 www eaton com 157    Appendix       Cables  Fuses and Disconnect Devices    The cross sections of the cables and cable protection fuses  used must correspond with local standards     For an installation in accordance with UL Standards  
194. meter to 0 0     P2 4  Al1    Filter time constant  analog input AI1  P2 8  AI2    Filter time constant  analog input AI2  P4 4  AO    Filter time constant  Analog output AO    Filter Time Constant    An     Al2       100     63           P24       t  s           P2 8   Al2  P4 4                       Notes     Analog signal with faults  unfiltered        Filtered analog signal       Filter time constant at 63  of the set value        70 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Parameters    Digital Inputs  P3     The parameter group P3 is used to set the operation and function of the digital inputs  DI1 to 016     Digital Inputs for Source and Sink Type                                                 a  2        5  S1   LOGIC  at        Source Type     S1   LOGIC      m 21   Sink            Source type  LOGIC     switch at the voltage source  All In the factory setting  the operation of the M Max is active  digital inputs are connected to the voltage sink via via control signal terminals  I O  with LOGIC   Source type             TOV referenge potentia e ND e DI1  control signal terminal 8   FWD  Forward   Start    Sink type  LOGIC   2 switch at the voltage sink enable clockwise rotating field    OV   reference potential GND   All digital inputs are    connected to the voltage source via microswitch S1    DI2  control signal terminal 9   REV  Reverse   Start enable    anti clockwise rotating field                    elisa actua Mone
195. motor manufacturers     The larger a motor is  the greater the time constant  The  factory set value  P8 9   45 min  can be set in the range  between 1 and 200 minutes  The guide value is twice tg time  of a motor  The tg time defines the time in seconds in which  a motor can be operated safely at six times the rated  operational current  see data sheet of the motor   manufacturer specifications      If the drive is stopped  the time constant is increased  internally to three times the set parameter value  P8 9      Calculation of Motor Temperature    oy 4                   105     P8 9                                         Motor current I Ir       Trip value shut off  error message  or warning according to P8 6      Calculated value for the motor temperature       1 7 2 x  1   e t T       Motor temperature 4      example     P8 9   Motor temperature time constant  T      92 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Protective Functions  continued    Factory Setting    Parameters                                                 PNU ID Value Range Description  P8 10 1430     Analog minimum reference error  reaction time  0 0 10 0s  see parameter P8 1   P8 11 1473      Not used   P8 12 714     Underload low torque limit  10 50  Motor torque  The underload protection enables faults such as a torn drive belt  or the dry running of a pump to be detected without any  additional sensors  The reaction to a detected underload can be set at P8
196. n shown on the  header of the right hand page  This does not apply to pages  at the start of a chapter or to empty pages at the end of a  chapter     n order to make it easier to understand some of the figures  included in this manual  the housing of the frequency  inverter  as well as other safety relevant parts  have been left  out  However  it is important to note that the frequency  inverter must always be operated with its housing placed  properly  as well as with all required safety relevant parts        Please follow the installation instructions in the  WA8230 2416 installation instructions document        This manual was created in an electronic format  You can  also order a hard copy version of it     All the specifications in this manual refer to the hardware and  software versions documented in it     More information on the series described here can be found  on the Internet under     www eaton com drives    About this Manual    Abbreviations and Symbols    The following symbols and abbreviations are used in this  manual                                   Abbreviation Description   EMC Electromagnetic compatibility   FS Frame size   GND Ground  OV potential   IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor   PDS Power Drives System   LCD Liquid Crystal Display   PE EMC connection to PE for shielded lines  PNU Parameter number   09 Underwriters Laboratories          M Max frequency converters are divided into four voltage  categories       100V  MMX11       200    MMX12   M
197. n the supply voltage is  switched back on  if the automatic restart function has  been enabled      See parameter      6 13         xii M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com       CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     Any contactors and switching devices on the power side are  not to be opened during motor operation  Inching operation  using the power switch is not permitted     Contactors and switching devices  repair and maintenance  Switches  on the motor side must never be opened while the  motor is in operation when the frequency inverter is set to  speed control operating mode  P11 8   1      Inching operation of the motor with contactors and switching  devices in the output of the frequency inverter is not  permitted        CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     Make sure that there is no danger in starting the motor   Disconnect the driven machine if there is a danger in an  incorrect operational status     A WARNING    If a start signal is present  the drive is restarted  automatically  if P3 1 0 is set  REAF   Restart after  FAULT  and the error message has been acknowledged   Reset      A WARNING    If a start command is present at a digital input  011 016   assigned at P3 21  the sequence control also starts  automatically  without switch edge  when the power  supply is switched on  for example  after a power supply  failure         CAUTION  
198. nation         FWD REV    READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT               REF                  PAR  4   FLT    DW TW en E  FWD REV lO KEYPAD BUS    The parameter menu always starts with the parameter P1 1     P1 1 2 1 means that you are guided through the parameters  by the Quickstart Wizard  Here you must confirm a specified  number of parameters individually  see A      P1 1   0 gives you free access to all parameters  see B      Schematic Representation of Parameter Access                                        A B       11 1  1   1 1 0  1  i  P12 0  2  P12 1 Piden    12 2 ed  P1 2 3                                Vv   P1 3         P117 4  1  1             M1 1 3   1 1   4 3  Item  Number Description  A Guided access and selected parameters with the Quickstart    Wizard  use OK button to move further        B Free access to all parameters  move further using the four  arrow buttons        1 Parameter conceal selection  P1 1   1  Factory setting   The quick start assistant guides you to the selected parameters   predefined parameter change   P1 1 2 0 allows access to all parameters  free parameter selection        2 Selection of pre defined parameter values for various applications   see table on Page 66   P1 2   0  Basic  no preliminary setting  P1 2   1  Pump drive    1 2 2  Fan drive  P1 2   3  Feed unit  high load           3 Completion of the quick configuration and automatic switch to  frequency display  Selecting the PAR menu level again allows the free selection of  the re
199. nd display value  M1 21 to zero       P3 25 1412 V     Activate secondary remote control source 0       Like P3 2 Assignment of control signal terminal    Move between the control levels set at P6 1 and P6 17   LOC REM function     P3 26 1413 V     Activate secondary remote speed reference 0          Like P3 2 Assignment of control signal terminal    Switch between the setpoint sources    1 and AI2 set at  P6 2 and P6 18    P3 27 1414 V     Activate second parameter set  2  5  0                      2 Assignment of control signal terminal  The values set at the parameter group P14 are activated    P3 28 1415          Fieldbus  remote input 0    Like P3 2 Assignment of control signal terminal          The assigned digital input is written directly to the general  status word  ID 2102  bit 11                    P3 29 1416          Counter reference value 1 0  0 65 535 Trigger value for   5 1   5 3   20   P3 30 1417          Counter reference value 2 0  0 65 535 Trigger value for   5 1   5 3   21        31 1418        DI1 logic  control signal terminal 8  0       The logic activates the response of the control signal  terminal  see figure on Page 71        N O contact  failsafe  N C contact                0 N O contact  1 N C contact   P3 32 1419 V     DI2 logic  control signal terminal 9  0  Like P3 31 Function       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 75    Parameters    Digital Inputs  continued                                     
200. nents  Always work with  another person in case an emergency occurs  Disconnect  power before checking controllers or performing  maintenance  Be sure equipment is properly grounded  Wear  safety glasses whenever working on electronic controllers or  rotating machinery     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    Warnings and Cautions       CAUTION    When selecting the cable cross section  take the voltage  drop under load conditions into account     The consideration of other standards  for example  VDE 0113  or VDE 0289  is the responsibility of the user      CAUTION  The specified minimum      conductor   EN 50178  VDE 0160  must be maintained     A WARNING    With frequency inverters  only AC DC sensitive residual  current circuit breakers  RCD type B  are to be used   EN 50178  IEC 755         CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     cross sections    Residual current circuit breakers  RCD  are only to be  installed between the AC power supply network and the  frequency inverter     A CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     If you are connecting multiple motors on one frequency  inverter  you must design the contactors for the individual  motors according to utilization category AC 3     Selecting the motor contactor is done according to the rated  operational current of the motor to be connected        CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     A changeove
201. ng  Switch threshold  set value of P5 8       28    Fieldbus  Remote outpu    The number of the assigned digital output is written directly to  the control word  1D2001  bit 13           P13 2 1454 X m    LOG function  Selection input B 0       Like P13 1       P13 3 1455 X E    LOG function  select operation 0       Logical operation  LOG  of the selected functions of  parameter P13 1  A  and P13 2  B     Signal Logic Link  LOG                        OR  Exclusive or   0 0 0  0 1 0 1 1  1 0 0 1 1  1 1 1 1 0                   The result of the logic operation  LOG  can be assigned to one  of the three digital outputs  DO   P5 3   RO1   P5 1 and   RO2   P5 2 with the value 24  or called via the serial interface   RS485  Modbus         or an optional fieldbus connection   CANopen  PROFIBUS DP        A AND B       AORB       A XOR B  exclusive A or B       120 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Second Parameter Set  P14     The selected parameters for a second motor are combined in  parameter group P14  This enables the alternative operation  of two motors at the output of the frequency inverter  even    with different rating specifications     In the factory setting  the parameters of this second       parameter set  P14  are identical to the factory settings of  the basic parameters  first parameter set  and described in    the relevant sections     Second Parameter Set    Parameters      14 1   14 6   P7 1   P7 6  motor    P14 
202. nt 1 when used in  conjunction with an assigned external interference  suppression filter        The required EMC measures should be taken into account in  the engineering phase  Improvements and modifications  during mounting and installation or even at the installation  site involve additional and even considerably higher costs     Industry    Category C3 C4    22 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Motor and Application    Motor Selection  General recommendations for motor selection     e Use three phase powered asynchronous motors with  short circuit rotors and surface cooling  also called  asynchronous motors or standard motors for the  frequency controlled drive system  PDS   Other  specifications such as external rotor motors  slip ring  motors  reluctance motors  synchronous or servo  motors can also be run with a frequency inverter  but  normally require additional planning and discussion  with the motor manufacturer       e Use only motors with at least heat class F   311  F  155  C  maximum steady state temperature         Four pole motors are preferred  synchronous speed   1500 min   at 50 Hz      1800            at 60 Hz     e Take the operating conditions into account for 51 operation   IEC 60034 1     e When operating multiple motors in parallel on one  frequency inverter  the motor output should not be more  than three power classes apart        Ensure that the motor is not overdimensioned  If a motor  in speed c
203. ntire  data transfer on the bus  Cross traffic between the individual slaves is not possible     Each data exchange is initiated only on request of the master  Only one request can be issued  on the cable  A slave cannot initiate a transfer but only react to a request with a response     Two types of dialog are possible between master and slave   e The master sends a request to a slave and waits for a response    e The master sends a request to all slaves and does not wait for a response  broadcast     More information on Modbus can be found under www modbus org     Communications in a Modbus Network    Modbus Network with                                     120 ohms 120 ohms             Lo   BE BE  25 26               The figures shows    typical arrangement with    host computer  master         any number   maximum 31 slaves  of frequency inverter M Max  slaves   Each frequency inverter has a  unique address in the network  This addressing is executed individually for each M Max via  system parameter 52 3 and is independent of the physical connection  position  in the network     Serial Interface A B    The electrical connection between master and the slaves The network cable must be provided at each physical end  connected in parallel is implemented via the serial interface  last station  with a bus termination resistor  120 ohms  in  A B  A   negative  B   positive  with a shielded RS485 order to prevent signal reflections and the resulting transfer  twisted pair cable  e
204. ntrol signal terminal with the specified  values from the factory settings when connecting the  allocated motor output  see  Commissioning with Control  Signal Terminals  Factory Setting   on Page 52      M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 61    Parameters    Setting Parameters    The following table is a good example of the general execution for selecting and setting    parameters     When the MMX is switched on for the first time  it activates the Quickstart Wizard to guide  you through specific parameters   See as per  Step  2      Setting Parameters                      Sequence Commands Display Description  0 _READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT Measured value 1 1  REFUS     The display changes automatically with the value of the output  Monl 4           frequency 0 00 Hz  at STOP   PAR     FLT    v  v     FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS  1 READY        STOP ALARM FAULT By actuating the BACK RESET button  you activate the menu level  BACK a a 24  arrow flashes   RESET REF            4     PAR  FLT    h          D rc    7 24  FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS      The two arrow buttons enable you to select the individual main       menus          REF   Setpoint input  reference   22          Operational data indicator  monitor   20    PAR  Parameter levels  2224 FLT   Fault log  Fault   Use the OK button to open the selected main menu  2 READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT The numerical first value is always shown from the selected main    menu       1  FWD REV 
205. om    MMX NET XB    The MMX NET XB interface module enables the flush  mounting and connection of fieldbus interface cards to the  frequency inverters in frame sizes FS4 and FS5     MMX NET XB Interface Module                                     Note  The MMX NET XB interface module is not supplied  with the M Max frequency inverter     Note  Detailed installation instructions are provided in  11040120107     The MMX NET XC interface module is fitted under the cover  on the right hand side  view from front of the keypad  of the  MMX frequency inverter     e First remove the cover of the frequency inverter  4 screws     Remove Cover  FS4  FS5        Appendix A    Accessories are provided with the MMX NET XB for fitting  the fieldbus interface card and interface module     Mounting Accessories for FS4    55    57        04             54  05             55    e To install  remove the screw in the bottom right corner of  the frequency inverter  chassis connection  board     e Then fit the metal bracket marked 04    FS4  or 05    FS5   with this screw       e Atthe top end of the metal bracket fasten the two metal  clips    The fieldbus interface cards with pluggable screw terminals  must be plugged in to support the terminals of the plastic  strip     Plastic Bridge for Holding the Control Terminals   For example             0 XMX NET PS A     1x       e Then connect the required fieldbus interface card to the                     interface module    M Max Series Adjustable Frequ
206. ompliant installation  we recommend the  following measures     e Installation of the frequency inverter in a metallic   electrically conducting enclosure with a good connection  to earth        Shielded motor cables  short cable lengths     Ground all conductive components and housings in a drive  System using as short a line as possible with the greatest  possible cross section  Cu braid      EMC Measures in the Control Panel    For EMC compatible installation  connect all metallic parts of  the device and the switching cabinet together over broad  surfaces and so that high frequencies will be conducted   Mounting plates and cabinet doors should make good  contact and be connected with short HF braided cables   Avoid using painted surfaces  anodized  chromized   An  overview of all EMC measures is provided in the figure on  Page 31     Install the frequency inverter as directly as possible  without  spacers  on a metal plate  mounting plate      Route input and motor cables in the switch cabinet as close  to the ground potential as possible  This is because free  moving cables act as antennas     When laying HF cables  for example  shielded motor cables   or suppressed cables  for example  input supply cables   control circuit and signal cables  in parallel  a minimum  clearance of 11 81 in  300 mm  should be ensured in order to  prevent the radiation of electromagnetic energy  Separate  cable routing should also be ensured when large voltage  potential differences are invo
207. onnected from the power supply  Due to the charge  in the capacitors  these parts may still be live after  disconnection  Fit appropriate warning signs    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Definitions and Symbols    A WARNING    This symbol indicates high voltage  It calls your  attention to items or operations that could be dangerous  to you and other persons operating this equipment   Read the message and follow the instructions carefully           This symbol is the  Safety Alert Symbol   It occurs with  either of two signal words  CAUTION or WARNING  as  described below     A WARNING    Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which  if not  avoided  can result in serious injury or death        CAUTION    Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which  if not  avoided  can result in minor to moderate injury  or serious  damage to the product  The situation described in the  CAUTION may  if not avoided  lead to serious results   Important safety measures are described in CAUTION  as  well as WARNING      Hazardous High Voltage     WARNING    Motor control equipment and electronic controllers are  connected to hazardous line voltages  When servicing  drives and electronic controllers  there may be exposed  components with housings or protrusions at or above  line potential  Extreme care should be taken to protect  against shock     Stand on an insulating pad and make it a habit to use only  one hand when checking compo
208. ontrol mode is underdimensioned  the motor  rating must only be one rating level lower    Connecting Motors in Parallel    The M Max frequency inverters allow parallel operation of  several motors in V Hz control mode     e V Hz control  several motors with the same or different  rated operational data  The sum of all motor currents must  be less than the frequency inverter s rated operational  current    e V Hz control  parallel control of several motors  The sum of  the motor currents plus the motors  inrush currents must  be less than the frequency inverter s rated operational  current    Parallel operation at different motor speeds can be  implemented only by changing the number of pole pairs and   or changing the motor s transmission ratio        CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     If you are connecting multiple motors on one frequency  inverter  you must design the contactors for the individual  motors according to utilization category AC 3     Selecting the motor contactor is done according to the rated  operational current of the motor to be connected     Engineering    Parallel Connection of Several Motors to  One Frequency Inverter                                                                                                                         Connecting motors in parallel reduces the load resistance at  the frequency inverter output  The total stator inductance is  lower and the leakage capacity of the lines greater 
209. ontroller setpoint  keypad 0 0 100 0  95 0 0  reference  P9 5 332      rw PID controller  setpoint source 0   Keypad unit  P9 4  95 0  1   Fieldbus  2        3   2  P9 6 334  4 rw PID controller  process variable  PV  0   Fieldbus 96 2  source  Actual value or feedback  1       2 Al2    9 7 336     rw PID controller  actual value 0 0 100 0  96 0 0  imiting  minimum  P9 8 337 V rw PID controller  actual value 0 0 100 0  96 100 0  imiting  maximum  P9 9 340 V rw PID controller  controller 0   Not inverted 96 0  deviation 1  Inverted  P9 10 32 V rw PID controller  D rate time 0 00 10 08 96 0 00  P9 11 431 V rw PID controller  output filter  0 00   10 0s 96 0 0  delay time  P9 12 016 V rw Sleep mode  frequency 0 00   P6 4 Hz 96 0 00  P9 13 018 V rw Sleep mode  wake up setpoint 0 0 100 0  96 25 0    9 14 017 V rw Sleep mode  delay time 0   3600s 96 30  P9 15 433 V rw Hysteresis  upper limit 0 0 100 0  97 0 0  P9 16 434 V rw Hysteresis  lower limit 0 0 100 0  97 0 0    9 17 435     rw PID controller  max  controller 0 0 100 0  97 3 0  deviation  P9 18 475 V rw PID controller  reference value 0 1 32 7 97 1 0  scaling  P9 19 476 V rw PID controller  process value 0 1 32 7 97 1 0  scaling  P9 20 478      rw PID controller  output signal 0 00 100 096 97 100 0  imit  M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 171    Appendix       Fixed Frequencies                                                                                              Access  F
210. ood knowledge of engineering  fundamentals and that you are familiar with handling  electrical systems and machines  as well as with reading  technical drawings     Control Signal Terminals and Microswitches       Al2 GND DO DI4 DI5 06 AO DO  813814   R24    4 5 13 14 15 16 18 20 22 23 26  070 010  OO      OO OO   1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 25 24                              410   AIT GND24V DI CDI1 012                21  22    pana E  eesessss    99 06 6609  SS       ES ERN             RS 485  Term     V  V                                                                                  M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 3              Series Overview    Component Identification    M Max Series                                  Item  Number Description       1 Frequency inverters MMX _       Mounting frame  for fieldbus connection  MMX NET XA       Fieldbus connection   CANopen XMX NET CO A  PROFIBUS   DP with XMX NET PS A screw terminals  PROFIBUS DP with XMX NET PD A Sub Dm connector  DeviceNet    XMX NET DN A       4 Communication module MMX COM PC           IP21 kit       4 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Checking the Delivery   Before opening the packaging  go over the ratings plate on  the packaging and check that the delivered frequency  inverter is the same type as the one you ordered     M Max frequency converters have been carefully packaged  and prepared for delivery  These devi
211. or is If the motor is not overloaded  check the temperature model  overloaded parameter  17 Motor underload Motor idle  connection to load machine interrupted This function must be activated at P8 5  The overload   for example  torn drive belt  message is set at P8 12 and P8 13  22 EEPROM checksum Error when storing parameters Contact your local Eaton representative  error Malfunction  Component fault  Error in microprocessor monitoring  25 Watchdog  API  Error in microprocessor monitoring Reset the fault and restart  Malfunction If the fault occurs again  contact your local representative  Component fault  27 Back EMF Electromotive force The rotation energy is greater than the braking energy  The voltage induced in the motor with the rotation Lengthen deceleration times  ee than the output voltage of the frequency Switch on brake chopper and braking resistor  Use higher rated frequency inverters  35 Application error The application is not working Contact your local Eaton representative  41 IGBT overtemp The IGBT switch temperature is above 248  F  120  C  Make sure that there is an unobstructed flow of cooling air  An excessive temperature warning is issued if the Check the ambient temperature  IGBT switch temperature goes above 230  F  110  C  Make sure that the switching frequency is not too high in  relation to the ambient temperature and to the motor load  Notes       There are subcodes associated with this error  To get the subcode scroll to the M  minute  value within
212. plication     The following shows a simplified connecting example of a  connection with default settings                                                                 Circuit Example Terminal Designation   E                                              mice                3      13      MMX11    PE Ground connection   6 Control voltage  24V  output  maximum 50 mA    8 FWD  start release clockwise rotating field   9 REV  start release left rotating field   U Connection for three phase AC motor  three phase motor    V   W   PE   3 Reference potential GND  0V    1 Setpoint value voltage  10V  output  maximum 10 mA    2 Frequency setpoint f Set  input 0   10V           Connect the frequency inverter according to the connection  example for simple commissioning with the specified default  settings  see connecting example above      If the connections for the setpoint value potentiometer  cannot be clearly allocated with terminals 1  2 and 3  you  should set the potentiometer to about 5096 before giving the  start release  FWD REV  for the first time     When the specified power supply is applied to connection  terminal L2 N and L3        11  or L1 and L2 N  MMX12  or  L1  L2 N and L3  MMX32  MMX34  MMX35   the LCD  display lights up and all segments are displayed briefly     The frequency inverter runs a self test automatically when  the power is applied     The arrows  A  in the top status line of the LCD display  show the operating status       READY   proper operating status 
213. ppendix       All Parameters    When first switching on or after activating the default settings  54 2   1  parameter P1 1 must  be set to 0 for access to all parameters     Parameter Selection                                           Access  FS User   PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P1 1 115     rw Quick start parameters 0   All parameters 66 67 1   1   Only quick configuration   parameters   P1 2 540 X rw Application 0   Basic 67 0   1   Pump drive   2   Fan drive   3   High load  P1 3 1472 X rw Country specific default settings 0   EU 67 1   1  USA  Analog Input   Access  FS User   PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P2 1 379      rw      signal range  analog input   microswitch S2  68 0   0   0 10V 0   20 mA   1   2 10V 4   20 mA  P2 2 380 V rw      custom minimum    100 00 to 100 0096 68 0  P2 3 381 V rw      custom maximum    100 00 to 100 0096 68 100  P2 4 378      rw AN  filter time 0 0 10 05 68 0 1  P2 5 390      rw Al2 signal range  analog input   microswitch S3  69 1   Like P2 1  P2 6 391     rw Al2 custom minimum    100 00 to 100 0096 69 0  P2 7 392      rw Al2 custom maximum    100 00 to 100 0096 69 100  P2 8 389      rw Al2  filter time 0 0 10 0s 69 0 1          164 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Appendix       Digital Input                                                                                                    Access  FS User  PNU ID RUN ro r
214. put signal  Alscal      e as frequency setpoint value from 0 1          P6 4         asa process variable from 0 100  actual value for the PID  controller    Example of Scaled Analog Input Signals                               100961           4       1      2              1     1  1201  P i        l  Pt    1            0    gt   0 30 80 100        2 2   2 3    2 6   2 7                   Example     P2  P2 6     3096  P2 3  P2 7    10096    The incoming analog input signal 0 10    4 20 mA  is not  evaluated in the selected range from 0 30   In relation to  the 30  signal  a constant offset signal of 2396 is predefined  in this case  The scaled input signal             is therefore  23 100      e as frequency setpoint value  23  frnax   fmax  P6 4     e asa process variable  23 100  actual value for the PID  controller    Example of Scaled Analog Input Signals with Offset         1                              gt    30 0 100  96   P2 2 P2 3  P2 6 P2 7                      M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 69    Parameters    Filter Time Constant    The filter time constant can be used to filter out disturbance  with analog signals     In the default setting the filter time constant is active with  0 1 seconds  The time value set here applies to 6396 of the  maximum analog signal   10V  20 mA      Long filter times lead to a delay in the analog signal  processing     You can deactivate the filter time constant by setting the  para
215. quired quick configuration parameters and the system  parameter  S        4 Free selection of all parameters  P1 1   0  with the two arrow  buttons   and V or  lt  and  gt        64 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Quickstart Wizard    The quick start assistant guides you in the quick  configuration through all important settings that have to be  made or that you should check for your application  see A in  figure on Page 64   The parameters that are called during the  process are listed in the table on Page 66  in the  Basic   Standard Drive   column     The process is run from parameter to parameter  Returning is  not possible here     In the quick configuration  the OK button activates  the individual parameter values and then moves on  to the next parameter  Every parameter always  shows the value that is set in alternating sequence   By actuating the OK button again  you activate the  value  value flashes      The arrow buttons have restricted  functionality  change of parameter values  and cursor control  in the quick start  configuration     aD               When the quick configuration is completed  the frequency  display M1 1 is activated automatically  Selecting the PAR  main menu again enables you to call up the parameters of  the quick configuration and then change them freely     Besides the parameters of the quick configuration  system  parameters 51 1 to S4 3 are also shown after the first  setting     P1 1 2 O
216. r P6 5       1 Flying restart circuit    Starting on a running motor  By switching on a small current  value  a small torque is created    With a frequency search  beginning with the maximum  frequency P6 4   the correct rotational field frequency is  determined  The output frequency is then adapted to the  specified setpoint frequency based on the defined acceleration   P6 5  and deceleration  P6 6  times    Use this function if  for instance  the motor is already turning at  the start command  with flow machines  pumps  fans  and  with short interruptions in input voltage    P6 8 506 X     Stop function 0    0 Free coasting          The motor carries out an uncontrolled stop  coasting  after  the start enable  FWD REV  is switched off or when the STOP  button  P6 16  is actuated       1 Ramp  deceleration    dynamic braking  Deceleration time with the value set under P6 6    If the energy that is fed back by the motor during the dynamic  braking is too high  the deceleration time has to be extended   On devices with internal braking transistors  the excess energy  can be dispelled through an external braking resistance   optional   see  Braking  P12   on Page 112              P6 9 500 X     S ramp 0 0  0 0 Linear acceleration and deceleration time based on P6 5  and P6 6  0 1 10 0s Time graded transition to start and end of the acceleration    ramp  P6 5  and deceleration ramp  P6 6   The time set here applies for both ramps  see figure below        S Formed Curve for Accel
217. r between the frequency inverter and the input  supply must take place in a voltage free state     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013  www eaton com xi    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    A WARNING    The frequency inverter outputs  U  V  W  must not be  connected to the input voltage  destruction of the  device  risk of fire      A CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     Switch S1 must switch only when frequency inverter T1 is at  zero current          WARNING    Carry out wiring work only after the frequency inverter  has been correctly mounted and secured     A WARNING    Electric shock hazard   risk of injuries     Carry out wiring work only if the unit is de energized        CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     Fire hazard     Only use cables  protective switches  and contactors that  feature the indicated permissible nominal current value        CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram     Ground contact currents in frequency inverters are greater  than 3 5 mA  AC   According to product standard IEC EN  61800 5 1  an additional equipment grounding conductor  must be connected  or the cross section of the equipment  grounding conductor must be at least 0 39 in   10 mm       A WARNING    The components in the frequency inverter s power  section remain energized up to five  5  minutes after the  supply voltage has been
218. r connection U T1  V T2  W T3 with ou    MMX11  1 7     4 8A         gt         N       a      lt                 MX12  1 7     9 6A     1 7     38A   X34  1 3     38A   MX35  1 7     9 0A    at an ambient temperature of  50  C with an overload capacity of 150  for 60s every 600  and a starting current of 200  for 2s every 208    put voltage U2  0 to 100   Ug  and output frequency 12  0 to 320 Hz  output current  12          4             zzzzz    ree phase asynchronous motor  variable speed control of three phase asynchronous motor for assigned motor shaft power values  P3    MX11  0 25     1 1 kW  230V  50 Hz  or 0 33     1 hp  230V  60 Hz     MX12  0 25     2 2 kW  230V  50 Hz  or 0 25     3 hp  230V  60 Hz     MX32  0 25     11 kW  230V  50 Hz  or 0 25     15 hp  230V  60 Hz     MX34  0 37     18 5 kW  400V  50 Hz  or 0 5     25 hp  460V  60 Hz     MX35  1   7 5 hp  575V  60 Hz        10    Keypad with control buttons  LCD display  control voltage  control signal terminals  microswitches and interface for the PC interface card  Option        14    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Selection Criteria   The frequency inverter  3  is selected according to the supply  voltage         of the input supply  1  and the rated current of  the assigned motor  2   The circuit type  A Y  of the motor  must be selected according to the supply voltage  1   The  rated output current lg of the frequency inverter must be  greater than equal
219. r than about 11 81 in  300 mm      35    Installation    Arrangement and Connection of the Power Terminals    The arrangement and size of the connection terminals depends on the construction of the  power section  FS1  FS2  FS3      The cross sections to use in the connections  the tightening torques for screws and  respective fuses are listed in the following table     Arrangement and Size of the Connection Terminals                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            i  T gt    M3          Part  Numbers mm  AWG mm in Nm ft lbs mm Terminal Configuration  FS1 MMX12AA1D7 0 2 2 5 24   12 8 0 31 05 06 037   044 06  35 L1 12  U T1 V T2 wits  MMX12AA2DA        12    208  Qoo O OG          2    107 02 25 24 12 8 0 31 0 5 0 6 037   044 06  35 1112    L3               2         MMX32AA2DA  MMX32AA2D8 _ eoo    Ol  MMX34AA1D3 02 25 24 12 8 0 31 0 5 0 6 037   044 0 6x3 5 Li 12 4 L3 R  R         V T2 Wits  MMX34AA1D9 _  MMX34AA2DA   eoo o oje  FS2 MMX11AA1D7_ 0 2 2 5 24   12 8 0 31 05 06 037   
220. rice information  returns other than warranty returns  and information on local distributors  or sales offices     Voice  877 ETN CARE  877 386 2273   8 00 a m    6 00 p m  Eastern Time U S   UTC  5    FAX  800 752 8602    After Hours Emergency  800 543 7038   6 00 p m  8 00 a m  Eastern Time U S   UTC    5      If you are in the U S  or Canada  and have     or PLC questions  you can take advantage of our  toll free line for technical assistance with hardware and software product selection  system  design and installation  and system debugging and diagnostics  Technical support engineers  are available for calls during regular business hours     Drives Technical Resource Center    Voice  800 322 4986 or  1 828 651 0984  8 00 a m    5 00 p m  Central Time U S   UTC    6    Fax   1 920 262 6070  e mail  TRCDrives Eaton com    For Customers in Europe  Contact     Eaton Industries GmbH   Electrical Sector   After Sales Service   Hein Moeller Str  7 11   D 53115 Bonn   Phone   49  0  228 6 02 3640   Fax   49  0  228 6 02 61400   Hotline   49  0  180 5 223822   e mail  AfterSalesEGBonn Eaton com  www moeller net aftersales       ii M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    Table of Contents       SAFETY  Before Commencing the Installation                                   x  Definitiorisand Symbols  s   isse             dnm eA                  xi  Hazardous Higli  Voltage  x                        
221. rks with its standard frequency   control again     This function is available only when PID control is active   P9 1   1      Do not switch the PID controller on and off while the  frequency inverter is in RUN mode  RUN LED is lit         Parameterize one of the digital inputs 1 to 6 as a PID  by  setting the parameter  P3 12   1   6   factory setting   P3 12   6      The Activate Disable PID Control function is optional  If you  want PID control to be active all the time  you only need to  set P9 1   1     PID System Deviation  0D     The PID system deviation  e  is the difference between  reference and actual value  process variable PV      The digital output configured as OD is activated if a freely  selectable control deviation  P9 17  is exceeded with the PID  controller  P9 1   1  active  The OD output stays activated  until this limit value is exceeded     If you wish to configure a parameterizable digital output or  signalling relay as OD  you must set the limit value that  activates the OD signal when exceeded at P9 17     Action  Then parameterize one of the digital inputs as OD  output by setting the value 12 at   5 1   5 3     Function Chart for OD  PID System Deviation        P9 17                P9 17                                                           Description  1 Setpoint value  2 Actual value       Feedback Value Check Signal  FBV   The FBV  Feedback Value Check  signal is issued when     e The actual value  PV  drops below the lower limit value   P9
222. rm  for example  AL 50   e 2   Fault  stop mode after error message based on parameters P6 8  for example  F   50     The  FAULT  and  ALARM  messages are described on Page 56     Protective Functions       Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P8 1 700 X     Analog minimum reference error  live zero  1       Monitors the live zero of the analog inputs AI1 and AI2 if the  parameters P2 1 and P2 5 are set to 1  4 mA  2V            control signal terminal 2  P2 1  AI2  control signal terminal 4  P2 5    A warning or error message  F    50  is output if the signal drops  below 3 0 mA or 1 5V for 5 seconds or 0 5 mA or 0 25V for  0 5 seconds  This reaction time can be changed at P8 10       0 Deactivated    1 Alarm  AL 50     Note  If the setpoint is restored  24 mA   2V  the drive starts  up automatically if there is no disconnection by the warning             message  2 Fault  F    50   stop function according to P6 8  P8 2 727 X     Undervoltage error 2       Under voltage error in the intermediate circuit because of a low  input side supply voltage  for example  by connecting 230V to a  400V device or if a phase drops out       0 Deactivated    1 Alarm  AL 09     Note  A start signal  START button  rising edge on the control  terminals  must exist again for restarting          2 Fault  F    09   stop function according to P6 8  P8 3 703 X    Ground fault 2          The ground fault monitoring checks the currents in the motor  phases and is continu
223. rminals A and B enable the connection of a shielded   5485  twisted pair cable     The bus terminating resistor required at the end of a data cable is integrated in the frequency  inverter and can be connected via microswitch SA     The network cable must have a bus termination resistor  120 ohms  connected at each  physical end to prevent reflections and the resulting transmission faults     Two Wire RS485 Connection   Slave   M Max Frequency Inverter        120 ohms             S4                                            RS485 Lem  Modbus  RTU          The parameter definition of the serial interface is described in  Serial Interface   Modbus          on Page 131     E           E             M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 45    Installation    Block Diagrams    The following diagrams show all the terminals on an M Max frequency inverter and their  functions at the default settings     MMX11   N Block Diagram          1 has a voltage doubler circuit inside the internal DC link  A power supply of 1      120V   115V  will output a motor voltage of 3 AC 230V                                                  my  TS        3 zs       eue        D ty 3      4  1 1 im  1     LES i           m      Bun g  Ra   24V Out   gt    24V   y E2   50 mA  ol  n  AB       R24 M  o  FWD  GND             REV     10 mA GJ a  FF1  fSoll f S  T  0 10V All Y a  FF2         gt   e o    Reset  S  3 a  3 a    PLOff  o                                  
224. ro frequency  Output frequency   0  Hz   10 Frequency monitoring 1  For the frequency ranges set at P5 4 and P5 5  11 Frequency monitoring 2  For the frequency ranges set at P5 6 and P5 7  12 PID monitoring  For the deviation set at P9 17  13 Overtemperature signal  14 Overcurrent control active  15 Overvoltage control active  16 PLC Sequence control active  17 PLC Sequence control  single step completed  18 PLC Sequence control  program cycle completed  19 PLC Sequence control  pause  20 Counter  value 1 reached  The counter value is Z the trigger value set at P3 21 and  can be reset by activating P3 24  21 Counter  value 2 reached  The counter value is z the trigger value set at P3 22 and  can be reset by activating P3 24  22 RUN message active  23 Analog minimum reference error    Message  AL 50 if the value of Al1 and or AI2 goes below  the 4 mA or 2V setpoint value  live zero   P2 1   1  P2 5   1        Values continued on next page    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive     04020003                 2013 www eaton com 119    Parameters    Logic Function  continued    Access    PNU ID RUN Value Range    Factory Setting  Description  P1 3        24    LOG function fulfilled  Message if the logical operation of P13 3 is fulfilled  LOG   1        25    PID controller  actual value monitoring    Message if the actual value is within the hysteresis set at P9 15  and P9 16       26    External brake actuated  Switch threshold  set value of P12 8       27    Current monitori
225. rrors  This necessary resistor is already integrated in the    M Max frequency inverter and is switched on via    The position of the connection terminals in the M Max for microswitch S4  see figure on Page 45      the serial interface A B  see figure on Page 45      The M Max s built in RS 485 port supports the Modbus RTU  protocol and therefore allows a direct network connection  without an additional interface module     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 131    Serial Interface  Modbus RTU     Modbus Parameters  The following table shows the Modbus parameters in the M Max     RUN Indicates the access during operation  FWD or REV  ro rw Indicates the access via the fieldbus  X   No parameter change possible  ro   Read only possible   4   Parameter change possible  rw   Read and write possible     Modbus Parameters in the                          Access FS  PNU ID RUN  ro rw Designation Value Range  P1 3   S2 1 8080 X ro Communication status Format xx yyy 0 000 6  xx   Number of received faulty messages  0 64            Number of received correct messages  0 999   S22 8090 Vv rw Fieldbus protocol 0   Fieldbus deactivated 00  1   Modbus  S2 3 8100 Vo rw Slave address 1 255 10  52 4 8110 vo rw Baud rate 0   300 50  1   600    2   1200  1 2k Baud  3   2400  2 4k Baud  4   4800  4 8k Baud  5   9600  9 6k Baud  6   19200  19 2k Baud   7   38400  38 4k Baud   8   57600  57 6k Baud     2 6 813 V rw Parity type 0   None I 2 Stop bits 0 
226. rrow  4   points to menu item REF  READY RUN STOP ALARM FAULT Actuating the START button enables the RUN mode  rotating field  o RENS      direction FWD                   mem     MON  PAR LI  LI LI   The STOP button  P6 16   1  activates the STOP mode  The Stop  EE Hz   function is set at parameter P6 8  v bd J  FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS  2 _ READY RUN STOR ALARM FAULT Pressing the OK button activates the setpoint entry  right hand            1 segment flashing                1              L I    LLLI 1  FLT   N    v J          w  FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS       The two arrow buttons     or     are used to select the entry digit   cursor                 2 MN       The arrow buttons   or v are used to select the value of the entry  digit  0  1  2     9  0    Note  Changes in the frequency setpoint are only possible if the  number display is flashing  Hz   even in RUN mode  The value is  stored when the display is constant   When the supply voltage is switched off  the last setpoint entered   see P6 15  and the KEYPAD mode are stored             M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive     04020003                 2013 www eaton com 129    Parameters    Setpoint Input  REF   continued       Sequence Commands Display   3 READY RUN STOP ALARM FAUL                   EE   o M I       PAR  11         FLT                                FWD REV I O KEYPAD BUS   Y  Display in Automatic      READY RUN STOP ALARM FAUL   REF CIE EE    um                   d 101 n    PAR  LI  Lu     EET  Hz   
227. s  FS User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P11 1 108 X rw V Hz characteristic curve 0   Linear 107 0  1   Squared  2   Configurable    11 2 602 X rw Cut off frequency 30 00   320 00 Hz 108 60 00  P11 3 603 X rw Output voltage 10 00 200 00  of the motor 108 100 00  rated voltage  P6 5   P11 4 604 X rw V Hz characteristic curve  0 00   11 2 Hz 109 60 00  mean frequency value  P11 5 605 X rw V Hz characteristic curve  0 00   11 396 109 100 00  mean voltage value  P11 6 606 X rw Output voltage at 0 Hz 0 00 40 0096 109 0 00    11 7 109    rw Torque increase 0   Deactivated 109 0  1   Enabled  P11 8 600 X rw Control mode 0   Frequency control  V Hz  109 0  1   Speed control with slip  compensation  P11 9 601 rw Carrier frequency 1 5 16 0 kHz 111 6 0  P1110 522 rw Sine wave filter 0   Deactivated 111 0   constant carrier frequency  1   Enabled       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 173    Appendix                                                                               Braking  A           User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P12 1 507 X rw DC braking  current 0 2    lg 2 x le 112 le  P122 516 X rw DC braking  braking time 0 00   600 00s 112 0 00  at start  P12 3 515 X rw DC braking  start frequency 0 00   10 00 Hz 113 1 50  P12 4 508 X rw DC braking  braking time at STOP 0 00   600 00s 114 0 00  P12 5 504 X rw Brake chopper  Only active and visible with braking 116 0  
228. s an register is 2105  dec  as the master PLC has an  offset of  1  offset of  1    0002 Total number of requested registers 0002 Total number of requested registers   42105 42106   32105 32106    4622 CRC F3E2 CRC          Slave response  05 03 04 05D7 0018 OFOD  hex        Slave response  05 04 04 05D7 0018 OEBA  hex                          Hex Name Hex Name   05 Slave address 05 Slave address   03 Function code  reading of holding registers  04 Function code  here  Reading of input registers    04 Number of consecutive data bytes 04 Number of consecutive data bytes   2 registers x 2 bytes   4 bytes   2 registers x 2 bytes   4 bytes    05D7 Content  2 bytes  of register 42105  1495  dec  05D7 Content  2 bytes  of register 32105  1495  dec    motor speed   1495 RPM   motor speed   1495 RPM    0018 Content  2 bytes  of register 42106  0024  dec  0018 Content  2 bytes  of registers 32106  0024  dec    motor current   0 24A   motor current   0 24A    OFOD CRC          CRC          140 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Function Code 06  hex   Writing a Holding Register    This function writes the data to a holding register  of  specified register addresses      Example     Writing of the control word  BUS   ID 2001  of an MMX  frequency inverter with the slave address 5     Master request  05 06 0700 0003 C2C8  hex                 Hex Name   05 Slave address   06 Function code  here  Writing of a holding register    0700 2000  d
229. sage       aia   STOP Sce ia  ex giu cn            111  41141    UE     5          FWD REV      KEYPAD BUS    If a warning message occurs  the frequency inverter remains  active  READY  RUN      In the given example  AL 50   current setpoint signal   4   20 mA interrupted   the drive stops following the absence  of a reference value  If no more measures are introduced  because of the warning message  for example  a shutdown    the drive can start again automatically in the example AL 50  when the current signal returns  for example  a contact fault  in the signal line      The alarm message  AL  is displayed alternating with the  active operational display value        The table on Page 57 shows the error codes  their possible  causes  and indicates correction measures        56 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    List of Fault Messages  F  and Warning Messages  AL     Error and Warning Messages                                                                               Display Designation Possible Cause Instructions  01 Overcurrent The frequency inverter has detected an excessive Check the load  current   gt  4 x In  in the motor cable Check the motor size  Sudden load increase Check the cable  Short circuit in motor cable  See parameter P6 6   Inadequate motor  02 Overvoltage The DC intermediate circuit voltage has exceeded the Increase braking time  internal safety limit  The delay time is too short  High overvoltage peaks 
230. sappears     A WARNING    If a start signal is present  the drive is restarted  automatically  if P3 1 0 is set  REAF   Restart after  FAULT  and the error message has been acknowledged   Reset      The current fault message indication  F1     is cleared when  the supply voltage is interrupted or when you press the OK  button followed by BACK RESET  The indication goes out  and the arrow tip     flashes at menu level MON     Fault Log  FLT     The last nine faults can be called up and shown in succession  in the fault log  FLT      Select the FLT menu level  4   Use the arrow buttons   and  v to call the faults F1   F9 individually  Every error message is  stored with the time of the error occurrence under d  day   H   hour  and m  minute   The call is made with the OK button   and the selection with the          v arrow buttons     The content of the error memory is cleared when the factory  setting is activated  When you press the BACK RESET  button  the display of the menu level  4  flashes and the  STOP button is held down for around 5 seconds     Activating the factory settings will reset all parameters     Alarm Messages    A warning message signals possible damage and indicates  impending errors that can still be prevented  such as an  excessively high temperature rise     Warning messages appear on the display with an arrow A  under ALARM and AL with the respective code number  The  code numbers for faults and warning messages are identical     Example of an Alarm Mes
231. se frequency        can be adjusted with  parameter     1 9     Note  Devices with strong magnetic fields  e g  reactors or  transformers  should not be installed in the immediate  vicinity of the M Max device     Air Baffle Due to Increased Circulation with Device Fan    If devices are arranged vertically above each other  the  clearance between the two devices must at least be equal to  dimension c   d   active neighbors       With frame sizes FS4 and FS5 a baffle must be fitted  between the two devices  Otherwise  the upper device may  overheat due to the device fan fitted at the top of the lower  device                          E  EE                               000000000    LL                                                     bo    4           mm mm mm mm m3 h  FS1 20 50 100 50 15 10  FS2 20 50 100 50 15 10  FS3 20 50 100 50 15 30  FS4 20 50 100 100 20 45  FS5 20 50 120 100 20 75  Note     0 With frame sizes FS1  FS2 and FS3 the side clearance can be 0 mm if the  ambient air temperature does not exceed  40      the pulse frequency   P11 9  does not exceed 4 kHz and the elevation does not exceed 1000m   Higher ambient air temperatures pulse frequencies and installation heights  above 1000m require a minimum side clearance of 20 mm from a   passive  neighbor  housing wall  and a clearance of 50 mm from an   active   need info  neighbor  frequency inverter  switched mode power  supply unit     With MMX34   014   the side clearance to a  passive  neighbor must  always be 
232. se of equipment   plant or power system  cost of capital  loss of power  additional expenses in the use of  existing power facilities  or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting  from the use of the information  recommendations and descriptions contained herein  The  information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice           Cover Photo  M Max Series Drives    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013  www eaton com i    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    Support Services    The goal of Eaton is to ensure your greatest possible satisfaction with the operation of our  products  We are dedicated to providing fast  friendly  and accurate assistance  That is why  we offer you so many ways to get the support you need  Whether it s by phone  fax  or  e mail  you can access Eaton s support information 24 hours a day  seven days a week   Our wide range of services is listed below     You should contact your local distributor for product pricing  availability  ordering  expediting   and repairs     Web Site    Use the Eaton Web site to find product information  You can also find information on local  distributors or Eaton s sales offices     Web Site Address    www eaton com electrical    EatonCare Customer Support Center    Call the EatonCare Support Center if you need assistance with placing an order  stock  availability or proof of shipment  expediting an existing order  emergency shipments  product  p
233. ses the setpoint defined at REF to be read   It can be set via the keypad with the arrow buttons or at  parameter P6 15    2 Fieldbus  BUS     Setpoint entry via Modbus RTU  control signal terminals A  and B  or optional fieldbus connection  for example  CANopen   PROFIBUS DP     3       analog setpoint 1           Voltage set value  0  2  10V at control signal terminal 2  Scaling and filtering  P2 1 to P2 4       4 AI2  analog setpoint 2   Current setpoint value  0  4   20 mA to control signal terminal 4  Scaling and filtering  P2 5 to P2 8       5 Motor potentiometer    The actuation is implemented via the digital inputs assigned at  P3 18 and P3 19  DI1   DI6   The required acceleration and  deceleration times can be set at P6 5  acc1  and P6 6  dec1     Assigning a digital input  DI1   DI6  at P6 20 enables the set  value of the motor potentiometer to be set directly to zero       82 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com                         lt     Drives Control  continued                            Access Factory Setting   PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3    P6 3 101 X     Minimum frequency 0 00  0 00   6 4  Hz       P6 4 102 X     Maximum frequency 60 00  P6 3 320 Hz       P6 5 103 X     Primary acceleration time  acc1  3 0  0 1 3000s  See figure and note 9 below    P6 6 104 X     Primary deceleration time  dec1  3 0  0 1 3000s  See figure and note    below        Acceleration and Deceleration Time    out     Hz    
234. so possible  fixed frequencies overlay all    setpoint values  also a fieldbus setpoint value       Another requirement is that the arrow W in the lower status line of the LCD display is pointing  to BUS  adjustable via the LOC REM button   The PLC  master  must also be provided with an  RS485 serial interface and the necessary Modbus RTU driver software     Operating Mode Modbus RTU    Operating mode Modbus RTU  Remote Terminal Unit  transfers the data in binary  format  faster data rate  and determines the transfer format for the data request and the  data response  Each message byte that is sent contains two hexadecimal characters   0   9  A     F      The data transfer between a master  PLC  and the frequency inverter             is carried out  according to the following sequence     Master request  the master sends a Modbus frame to the frequency inverter     Slave response  the frequency inverter sends a Modbus frame as a response to the master     Data Exchange Between Master and Slave              Start  Address  1 Byte   Function Code  1 Byte     Data  N x 1 Byte   CRC  2 Bytes   End    Master MMX  Slave                                                     Start  Address  1 Byte   Function Code  1 Byte   Data  N x 1 Byte     CRC  2 Bytes   End                     The frequency inverter  slave  only sends a response if it has received a request from the  master beforehand     Notes     Master request      Slave response  not with broadcast     M Max Series Adjustable 
235. t for  24V  positive logic  source type   You can use  the device internal control voltage of control signal terminal 6   4 24V  maximal 50 mA  or an external voltage source  24V   with a residual ripple less than  5  AUa Ua  The  parameterizable functions are described in  Digital Inputs   P3   on Page 71     Digital Inputs with Internal Supply Voltage       S1   LOGIC   S   Source Type  9   ES    Digital Inputs with External Supply Voltage      24V      ov               5  ue       51 JN      1   LOGIC  at   Source Type      21    The factory set functions and the electrical connection data  are shown in  Control Signal Terminal Functions  on  Page 40                   DI COM  M     24V Out             Microswitch S1  LOGIC  is used to change the control logic  to so called negative logic  sink type   The digital inputs are  connected internally or externally via control signal terminal 7   DI  COM  directly to  24V and to the corresponding OV  potential  GND  via input terminals DI1 to DI6     Digital Inputs with Internal Supply Voltage   Negative Logic  Sink Type                  1   LOGIC  o   Sink Type        42 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Digital Inputs with External Supply Voltage   Negative Logic  Sink Type     ov          24V                                  25  42    al        sia z   a           aa  zig 9              DE   W       Peo          O    9   S1   LOGIC  9      Sink Type     Digital Outputs  Transis
236. tandard rating     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    143    Appendix                                                                                                                Device Series MMX32          2         0 0 Symbols 9 Unit 107 204 208 307 408 700 011 017 025 031 038  Rated operational current le A 127  2 4 28 3 7 48 7 11 17 5 25 31 38  Overload current for 60s IL A 2 6 3 6 42 5 6 72 10 4 144 26 3 375 46 5 57  every 600s at 122 F  50       Starting current for 2s       34 4 8 5 6 74 9 6 14 19 2 35 50 62 76  every 208 at 122  F  50  C   Apparent power at rated 230V 5        0 68 0 96 1 12 1 47 1 91 2 79 3 82 7 10 124 15 1  operation 240V 5        07 099 116 154 199 21 39 73 104 129 158  Assigned motor rating 230V P kW 0 25 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 22 4 5 5 75 11  HP 1 4 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 2 2 3 5 75 10 15   Power side  primary side    Number of phases Three phase   Rated voltage UIN V 208V    1526   240V  109  50 60 Hz    177   264V   096  45 66 Hz 4096    Input current         27 3 5 3 8 4 3 6 8 84 13 4 20 6 30 3 36 6 44 6  Maximum leakage current  to ground  PE  without  motor   MMX32   N IpE mA 8 6 8 6 8 6 16 1 16 1 16 1 8 6 14 14 9 9  Braking torque   Default M MN   z30 50 510 530 530 530 5310 50 50 530 53   Brake chopper with             Max  10096 rated operational current   external braking le with external braking resistance   resistance   Minimum braking Rg ohms             35 35 35 26 14 14 9 9   resistance   S
237. tart  2  0 10V  4 20 mA  Item  Number Description  1 Frequency inverter with PID controller for   1 fan motor  2 Motor starter  frequency inverter  soft starter  contactor  for    M2 fan motor    FWD  Start signal drive 1   FBV  Actual value message of drive 1 for activating drive 2   Start  Start signal  drive 2        With the closed loop control example shown here  the  sequence is based on the signal diagram in the figure on this  page  The process variables in the limit values are shown in  percent      The output frequency  Hz  is shown  superimposed in the same diagram     e Start of fan motor M1 with FWD signal  The actual value   PV  is below the limit value of P9 16  The FBV output     5 1   5 3   25  then switches and fan motor M2  Start   starts automatically    e The actual value rises and reaches the upper limit  P9 15    The FBV output is automatically switched off  2 fan M2  Off   Fan M1 remains in operation and works in linear  control mode  In a correctly set up system  this is the  normal operating range       e  f the actual value drops below the limit value  P9 16   the  FBV output is switched  and fan M2 is activated again to  support fan M1    e When the FWD signal is removed from frequency  inverter 1  the inverter goes from RUN to STOP mode and  decelerates the drive over the set ramp time    e When frequency inverter 1 is stopped  the FBV output is  automatically de energized so that fan M2 also stops    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN0402
238. ter is stored before use  suitable  ambient conditions must be ensured at the site of storage     e Storage temperature     40   to 158  F   40   to 70           Relative average air humidity    9596  non condensing   EN 50178       To prevent damage to the DC link capacitors  storage  times longer than 12 months are not recommended   see  Charging DC Link Capacitors  below     Charging DC Link Capacitors   After long storage times or long down times without a power  supply    12 months   the capacitors in the DC link must  undergo controlled recharging  in order to avoid damage     For this  the M Max frequency inverters must be fed with a  regulated DC power supply unit via two input connection  terminals  for example  L1  L2 N   To avoid any possible  excessive leakage currents from the capacitors  the inrush  current should be limited to around 300 to 800 mA   depending on the rating   In this case  the frequency inverter  must not be enabled  no start signal   The DC voltage must  then be set to the values of the corresponding DC link  voltage  Upc  and fed for around two hours  regeneration  time      e MMX12  MMX32 about 324 Vdc    1 41 x        with  single phase line to line voltage  230V                4 about 540 Vdc    1 35 x            with three phase  line to line voltage  400V     e MMYX35  contact your local Eaton sales office for details        MMX1 1  Due to the internal voltage doubler circuit  the  capacitors cannot be recharged via the connection termina
239. the  fuses and copper cable that are UL approved and have a  heat resistance of 60   75 C are to be used     Use power cables with insulation according to the specified  mains voltages for the permanent installation  A shielded  cable is not required on the mains side  On the motor side  however  a complete  360   low impedance shielded cable is  necessary     The length of the motor cable depends on the radio  interference class and is a maximum of 30m at M Max        CAUTION    Fuses and cables selected must always comply with the  applicable regulations at the installation site     158 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Maximum Cross Sections    Appendix A                                                                      L1  L2 N  L3 U  V  W PE R   R      mm2 AWG    mm2 AWG          AWG          AWG     MMX11AA1D7    2x25 2x14 3x25 3x14 2 5 14          MMX11AA2D4           11    208     MMX11AA3D7     MMX11AA4D8    2x6 2x10 3x6 3x10                MMX12AA1D7    2x15 2x16 3x 1 5 3x16 1 5 16              12    204           12    208     MMX12AA3D7     MMX12AA4D8    2x25 2x14 3x25 3x14 2 5 14                  2    700           12    906    2x6 2x10 3x6 3x10 6 10        MMX32AA1D7    3x 1 5 3x16 3x1 5 3x16 1 5 16                 2    204             2    208     MMX32AA3D7     MMX32AA4D8    3x 1 5 3x16 3x1 5 3x16 1 5 16                 2    700             2    011    3  2 5 3  14 3  2 5 3  14 2 5 14 2x25 2x14  MMX32AA012  
240. the Quick Start  continued                                                       Access  FS User   PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  S2 6 813      rw Parity type 0   None  no  see 2 stop bits 126 0   1   Even  see 1 stop bit   2   Odd  see 1 stop bit   2 7 814      rw Communication timeout 0   Not used 126 0   1 15   2 25      255   up to 255s   2 8 815 V rw Reset communication status 0   Not used 126 0   1   Resets parameter 52 1   3 1 827 X ro MWh counter MWh 126      S32 828 X ro Operating days  d  0 0000 days 126     3 3 829 X ro Operating hours  h  0 24 h 126     534 840 X ro RUN counter  days 0   0000 days 126      S3 5 841 X ro RUN counter  hours 0 24 h 126     3 6 842 X ro Fault alarm counter Trip Counter  0 0000 126       4 1 830 V rw Display contrast 0 15 126 7   4 2 831 X rw Restore factory defaults 0   Factory setting or changed value 126 0   1   Restores factory settings for all   parameters    4 3 832      rw Password 0000 9999 126 0000  Default I O  Designation Terminal Function Parameter Designation Terminal Function Parameter  Di      8         P34 P32 DI6 16 PID Controller Deactivate P3 12  DI2 9 Stop Start Rev P3 1  P3 3   01        22 23 Run P5 1  P5 10  DI3 10 Fixed Frequency       12 Hz  P3 9  P10 2   02  NO NC  24 25 26 Fault P5 2  P5 11  014 14 Fixed Frequency B1  18 Hz  P3 10  P10 3 DO 13 Ready P5 3  P5 9  015 15 Fault Reset P3 7       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 163    A
241. the figure above was released with three times fold output    1 3 kW      Because of the higher thermal loading  using only the next  higher motor output according to the list  1 1 kW  is  recommended  The motor  in this example  therefore still has  1 47 fold higher output compared with the listed output   0 75 kW      With the 87 Hz characteristic curve  the motor also works in  the range from 50 to 87 Hz with an unattenuated field  The  pull out torque remains at the same level as in input  operation with 50 Hz     The heat class of the motor must be at least F in 87 Hz  operation     V Hz Characteristic Curve    U           4004    230           The following table shows the allocation of possible  frequency inverters depending on the input voltage and the  type of circuit     Assignment of Frequency Inverters to Example Motor Circuit  See Figure Above                                Frequency Inverters MMX12AA3D7_ MMX32AA3D7_ MMX34AA2D4_ MMX34AA4D3_  Rated operational current 3 7A 3 7A 24   4 3     Input voltage 1 AC 230V 1 AC 230V 3 AC 400V 3 AC 400V   Motor circuit Delta Delta Star Delta  V Hz characteristic curve               Motor current 3 5A 3 5A 2 0A 3 5A   Motor voltage 3 AC 0 230V 3 AC 0 230V 3 AC 0 400V 3 AC 0   230V  Motor speed 1430            1430            1430            2474                Motor frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 87 Hz   Notes       Star connection  400V  50 Hz       Delta connection  230V  50 Hz    G Delta connection  400V  87 Hz       Note th
242. the function code as  a response    Slave Response in the Event of an Error    If a request contains an error  for example  incorrect data  address or incorrect data value  other than a transfer error   the frequency inverter returns an exception message without  executing anything  You can evaluate the exception message    134 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Structure of Exception Message  e Address  of the master request     e Function code  of the master request   MSB is set to 1   for example  with function code 06   1000 0110         Data field contains the error code  is described in the  following table                   Error Code Description    Serial Interface  Modbus RTU                    Exception Code Meaning Description   01 Illegal function This function is not supported   02 Illegal data address The address was not found   03 Illegal data value The data format is not permissible or is incorrect   04 Slave device error Occurrence of a non regenerative error while the slave attempted to execute a slave response  06 Slave device busy The slave has received the master request error free  However  it is engaged in processing a    lengthy command       Example   Master request that contains a non existent data address   Master request  01 06 0802 0001 EBAA  hex                    hex Name   01 Slave address   06 Function code  here  Write a holding register    0802 2050  dec   The ID number of the written register
243. the output frequency is immediately blocked   uncontrolled coasting   P6 8   1 causes the drive to perform  a controlled deceleration  1      Example  Activation of the Fixed Frequencies in the Factory Setting with Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps    f   Hz     P6 5 P6 6    fmax     50 Hz                             20 Hz    15 Hz    10 Hz       0 Hz             1    68 1                100 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Fixed Frequency Setpoint Value    PNU    ID    Access  RUN    Value Range    Parameters    Factory Setting  Description  P1 3        P10 1    124    v    Fixed frequency FFO 6 00       0 00 P6 4    0 00 Hz up to the maximum frequency value  P6 4     This value is only active if the setpoint input has been set to  parameter P6 2   0       P10 2    105    Fixed frequency FF1 12 00       0 00 P6 4    0 00 Hz up to the maximum frequency value  P6 4     In the factory setting  this value can be called directly via DI3   control signal terminal 10        P10 3    106    Fixed frequency FF2 18 00       0 00 P6 4    0 00 Hz up to the maximum frequency value  P6 4     In the factory setting  this value can be called directly via 014   control signal terminal 14        P10 4    126    Fixed frequency FF3 24 00       0 00 P6 4    0 00 Hz up to the maximum frequency value  P6 4     In the factory setting  this value can be called directly by joint  actuation of control signal terminals 10 and 14  013 and 014        
244. tober 2013 www eaton com 181    Appendix       Door Keypad Mounting Instructions  continued    Step Instructions  4 Fix the grounding cable  item 3  against the backside of the cabinet door through one of the  screw holes     Note  Make sure that a proper contact with the cabinet door is achieved  If necessary  remove  the paint from the metal surface  Place the washers  attached to the screws  between the door  and the screws  The tightening torque to be applied is 1 5 Nm  Connect the data cable  item 3   to the terminal of the keypad                    5 Assemble door panel adapter  item 4  to a cover and UART connector  After that  connect cable   item 3  to door panel adapter  item 4            6 Assemble text panel  item 2  to door keypad base  item 1    First   Push This End        Second   Push This End  To Snap In       182 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Appendix       Dimensions  Approximate Dimensions in inches  mm     The graphic is in real size  Use it to mark the cut out  for the door keypad and the holes for the screws     Door Keypad Cut out Dimensions    Panel Cut out 4 pcs  6           2 SY                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             Y   XO                
245. tor    The transistor output  control signal terminal 13  DO   can be  supplied with the internal control voltage   24V  via control  signal terminal 20  DO   or with an external DC voltage of up  to  48V  The permissible residual ripple must be less than   5  AUg Ua  The maximum permissible load current is   50 mA     Digital Output DO and Connection Examples   Coupling Relay with Freewheeling Diode   ETS4 VS3  Item No  083094              ov   24V        5  T    Installation    Connection Example and Operation of DO in  Source and Sink Type     24V  24V             ov oV    Source Type Sink Type    The parameter assignment is described in    Digital Outputs   P5  on Page 78     M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 43    Installation    Digital Outputs  Relays   The following figure shows the arrangement of the connection terminals for both relay contacts     Relay Outputs with Connection Examples  Control Relay with Suppressor Circuit                               250V   52    250V  x0 4A         A    _      Varistor RC Filter Diode  AC AC AC DC  DC  The two relay outputs  control signal terminals 22 to 26  The functions for which parameters can be defined are  enable the frequency inverter to generate galvanically described in  Digital Outputs  P5     on Page 78   isol f k signals i   circui ith oth    eae    Signa SIN CONTO          wets  The factory setting causes N O contact R13 R14  control    signal terminal 22 23  of relay 
246. tor is very low   even small induction can generate high rotor currents and  thus a strong braking effect     Braking    Access  PNU ID RUN Value Range    Description    As the speed decreases  the frequency of the induced  voltage reduces and therefore the inductive resistance also   The ohmic resistance becomes more effective and thus  increases the braking effect  However  the generated braking  torque drops off abruptly before the rotor is at a standstill and  disappears completely as soon as the rotor movement has  ended     DC braking is therefore not suitable for holding loads  nor for  intermediate braking  Once DC braking has been activated   the motor comes to a standstill     A CAUTION    Debounced inputs may not be used in the safety circuit  diagram  DC braking results in additional heating of the  motor  Configure the brake torque  set via braking current   P12 1  and the braking duration  P12 2 and P12 4   as low as  possible     Factory Setting   P1 3        P12 1 507 X      DC braking  current le       0 2 x le 2 x lg  A     Set value for the DC current  which supplies the motor    during the DC braking    The value depends on the rated operational current    of the  frequency inverter    The parameter is only active  if a value  gt 0 has been entered  for P12 2 or P12 4       P12 2 516 X      DC braking  braking time at start 0 00       0 00 600 00s    The braking time of the DC braking  1  is activated with the    start command  FWD  REV        Braking Time
247. tory set  for the frequency setpoint  P6 2   The setpoint can be input  via an external potentiometer  recommended fixed  resistance  1 10   ohms   The fixed resistance of the setpoint  potentiometer is fed from the frequency inverter via control  signal terminal 1 with   10V  maximum load rating  10 mA    Control signal terminals 3 and 5 are reference points  GND   for the analog setpoint signals     Installation    Analog Setpoint Inputs Al1 and AI2  Connection example  Potentiometer  4 7k ohms   M22 R4K7  Article No  229490             200k ohms 200k ohms  200 ohms 52 53 200 ohms     E        10V Out  Al2    GND                    f Soll  0 10V  PI Ist    0  4  20 mA                          T         E  53   AI2 mA           4 20 mA   S2          2        0 10V     Analog Setpoint Value Signal  for Example  from a  Superordinate Controller  PLC        200k ohms       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 41    Installation    Analog Outputs   The frequency inverter provides an analog voltage signal   0   10V  at control signal terminal 18  This signal is factory set  proportional to the output frequency  0 1          The calibration  and parameterization of the analog output are described in   Analog Outputs  P4     on Page 77     Analog Output AO  Connection Examples           Digital Inputs   The frequency inverter has six digital inputs  DI1 to DI6  that  have an identical function and operation  Their actuation is  factory se
248. transistor installed   0   Deactivated  1   Automatic activation in operation   RUN   2   Automatic activation in operation   RUN  and upon stop  STOP   P12 6 447 X rw Brake chopper  DC bus  Only active and visible with braking 116 0  switching threshold transistor installed   0 870V  P127 448 X rw External brake  delay time 0 00 320 008 117 0 20  opening  P12 8 449 X rw External brake  frequency 0 00   P6 4 Hz 117 1 50  threshold opening  P12 9 450 X rw External brake  frequency 0 00   P6 4 Hz 117 1 00  threshold closing  P12 10 451 X rw External brake  frequency 0 00   P6 4 Hz 117 1 50  threshold REV closing  P12 11 452 X rw External brake  current limit 0 00   P7 2 A 117 0 00  opening       174 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Logic Function  Access  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation    P13 1 1453 X rw LOG function   Selection input A    Appendix A    FS User  Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting    0   Deactivated 119 0  1   READY   2  RUN   3   FAULT   4   Error message  inverted    5   ALARM   6   REV   7   Output frequency   frequency setpoint  8   Motor controller active   9   Zero frequency   10   Frequency monitoring 1   11   Frequency monitoring 2   12   PID monitoring   13   Overtemperature signal   14   Overcurrent control active   15   Overvoltage control active   16   PLC sequence control active    17   PLC sequence control  single step  completed    18   PLC sequence control  program cycle  completed    19   PLC Sequenc
249. ts                             29  EMC Compliant Setup  Example  M Max                                      31  Three Phase Input Connection    sius pee eR eee  ORDER ND Peres e 33  Connection to Power  Section     cubes tes e pb RD Ie Ra e                     ds aa ad 33  Ground    Connection       exem            Sb thn aie eX ES bua ENSE      quens 33  Connection in POWer SectlOD      xccx nus Rh Cet b SR x OE RO QUIS NU        34  Screened  Connection Cable i ss zer eR RED    YR dE RIS Teluwtzde 35  Connection with Twisted Cable Shielding                                     35  Four Core Shielded Motor Supply Cable                                      35  Position of Control Signal                                                             38  Prevent the Shield from Becoming Unbraided                                 38  Example for a Single Side Connection  PES  to the Frequency Inverter              38  Example for an Insulated End of the Control Cable                              38  Control Signal Terminals Assignments and Designations                         39  Microswitch  Factory Settings  suere Tu Re                  bu Qedorfade 39  Control Signal Terminals  Digital and Analog Inputs Outputs                       41  Analog Setpoint Inputs All          12                                           41  Analog Setpoint Value Signal  for Example  from a Superordinate Controller  PLC      41  Analog Output AO  Connection Examples                                     
250. ut   I EE        s c td ctu e                     S esed fe d  Modbus Parameters in the M Max                                           Error CodeiDescfiptlORn   3   v  xot esee ee o e E E hen wate               viii    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com                        21  24  27  34  36  39  40  57  59  60  61  62  66  67  67  68  72  77  78  82  89  90  95  100  101  102  103  107  112  119  121  125  127  128  129  132  135    M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive    List of Tables  continued    D  vice Series  MMXdIA   2 2 ai    pereas OIL Ee MC PRESS 142  Device  Series  MM X12  s yav pete sen set ite                          pel eite            143  Device Series  MMX392    exam tuu RIA SERE                      RS a ee 144  Device Seri  s MMX394                            end ark      Ie epu pecu dre du ed 145  Device Series  MMX35                               d xem epe aU E I RN DV Peas 147  Dirnerisions and  Frame  Sies   scena             eu REN gin E d Rd 150  Fuses and Maximum Cross Sections                                         159  Specified Fuses and Disconnect Devices                                     160  Quick Start  Parameter Guide zu i select                   YE ae eio NS Red prid 161  System Parameters in the Quick Start                                        162              IPIE 163  Parameter Selection s c rd                       et    oet oed  Eo                   S han 164  A  alog       
251. ut deviations     On frequency inverters  a input reactor limits the input  feedback to permissible values  The harmonic current  emissions that are fed back into the input network   input  feedback   are reduced  This reduces the input side apparent  current to about 3096     Toward the frequency inverter  the input reactors dampen  the interference from the supply network  This increases the  withstand voltage of the frequency inverter and lengthens  the lifespan  diodes of the input power rectifier  intermediate  circuit capacitors      For the operation of the M Max frequency inverter  the  application of main chokes is not necessary     We do recommend  however  that an upstream main choke  is used because the network quality is not known in most  cases     While planning the project  consider that a input reactor is  only assigned to a single frequency inverter for isolation   Using a large input reactor for multiple small frequency  inverters should therefore be avoided if at all possible     When using an adapting transformer  assigned to a single  frequency inverter   a main choke is not necessary     Input reactors are designed based on the input current  1      of the frequency inverter  Input chokes and the assignment  to M Max frequency inverters are explained in the appendix     20 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Safety and Switching    Fuses and Cable Cross Sections    The fuses and wire cross sections allocat
252. value  P3 19 406      rw Motor potentiometer  Like P3 2 74 0                      decrease value       M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 165    Appendix       Digital Input  continued                                                                                                                                  Access  FS User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P3 20 407 V rw Motor potentiometer  Like P3 2 74 0  set value to zero  P3 21 408      rw PLC program start Like P3 2 74 0  P3 22 409      rw PLC program pause Like P3 2 75 0  P3 23 410      rw Counter  input signal Like P3 2 75 0  P3 24 411 V rw Counter  reset Like P3 2 75 0  P3 25 412 V rw Activate secondary remote Like P3 2 75 0  control source  P3 26 413 V rw Activate secondary remote Like P3 2 75 0  speed reference  P3 27 414      rw Activate second parameter set Like P3 2 75 0   2PS   P3 28 415 V rw Fieldbus  remote input Like P3 2 75 0  P3 29 416 V rw Counter reference value 1 0 65535 75 0  P3 30 417 V rw Counter reference value 2 0   65535 75 0  P3 31 418      rw DI1 logic 0 N 0 75 0   control signal terminal 8   N C  P3 32 419 V rw DI2 logic Like P3 31 15 0   control signal terminal 9   P3 33 420 V rw DI3 logic Like P3 31 76 0   control signal terminal 10   P3 34 421 V rw DI4 logic Like P3 31 76 0   control signal terminal 14   P3 35 422 V rw 015 logic Like P3 31 76 0   control signal terminal 15   P3 36 423      rw DI6 logic Like P3 31 
253. voltage signal  0 2       10V    e S3   mA  AI2  control signal terminal 4   current signal  0 4     20 mA    Reference potential for the analog inputs  Al1  AI2  is GND   control signal terminals 3 and 5      The allocation of the analog inputs  Al1  Al2  can be set under  parameter P6 2 and P6 18  setpoint input  as well as P9 5  and P9 6  PI controller  actual value      Analog Inputs    Access    PNU ID RUN Value Range Description    Analog Inputs AI1 and AI2       200k ohms 200k ohms    2    200 ohms 52 53 200 ohms                        GND   10V Out    10 mA  All            GND             12                5011  0 10V  PI Ist    0  4  20 mA                ir    E 53   AI2 mA  S  lt        4 20 ma      0 10V              Factory Setting   P1 3        P2 1 379 V           signal range  analog input  0       Depending on the switch position of microswitch S2   FS 2 frequency setpoint        0 S2   V  0 10V  voltage signal  FS  see P6 2   52   mA  0 20 mA  current signal       1 With live zero     S2   V  2 10V  voltage signal  S2 2 mA  4 20 mA  current signal    At P8 1 it is possible to set the response of the MMX  to a setpoint error  life zero          2 2 380 V           custom minimum 0 00        100 00  to  100 00     Scaling of the analog input signal  V mA  in the zero range   minimum response value     See    Scaled Value Range  Al1  AI2   on Page 69       P2 3 381 V             custom maximum    100 00        100 00  to  100 00     Scaling of the analog input s
254. w Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P3 1 300      rw Start Stop Logic 0   DI1  FWD   012  REV   REAF 72 3  1  DI1  FWD    012   REV  2   DI1  Start pulse   012  stop pulse   3  011  FWD   DI2  REV   P3 2 403 V rw Start signal Start FWD  1  0   Deactivated 72 1  1  Activated via control signa  erminal 8  011   2   Activated via control signa  erminal 9  DI2   3   Activated via control signa  erminal 10  DI3   4   Activated via control signa  erminal 14  014   5   Activated via control signa  erminal 15  015   6   Activated via control signa  erminal 16  DI6        3 404 V rw STOP signal Start REV  1  Like P3 2 72 7  P3 4 412 V rw Reverse Like P3 2 72 0  P3 5 405 X rw Ext  fault close  N O  Like P3 2 72 0  P3 6 406 X rw Ext  fault open  N C  Like P3 2 73 0  P3 7 414      rw Fault reset Like P3 2 73 5  P3 8 407 V rw Run enable Like P3 2 73 0  P3 9 419 P4 rw Fixed frequency  Like P3 2 73 3  binary value BO  P3 10 420 V rw Fixed frequency  Like P3 2 73 4  binary value B1  P3 11 421 V rw Fixed frequency  Like P3 2 73 0  binary value B2  P3 12 020 V rw PID controlle Like P3 2 74 6  deactivate  P3 13 400          Not used               P3 14 401 V rw External brake  Like P3 2 74 0  feedback signal  N O   P3 15 402 V rw Change acceleration  Like P3 2 74 0  deceleration time  acc 2 dec 2   P3 16 403      rw Stop acceleration deceleration Like P3 2 74 0  time  P3 17 404     rw Block parameter access Like P3 2 74 0  P3 18 405 V rw Motor potentiometer  increase Like P3 2 74 0  
255. w R02  off delay 0 00   320 00s 81 0 00  Drives Control  Access FS User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P6 1 125      rw Primary remote control source 1   Control signal terminals  1 0  82 1  2   Operating unit  KEYPAD   3   Fieldbus  BUS   P6 2 117 V rw Primary remote speed reference 0   Fixed frequency          82 3  1   Operating unit  REF   2   Fieldbus  BUS   3 All  4 Al2  5   Motor potentiometer  P6 3 101 X rw Minimum frequency 0 00   P6 4 Hz 83 0 00  P6 4 102 X rw Maximum frequency P6 3   320 00 Hz 83 60 00  P6 5 103 X rw Primary acceleration time  acc1  0 1   3000s 83 3 0  P6 6 104 X rw Primary deceleration time  dec1  0 1   3000s 83 3 0  P6 7 505 X rw Start function   Ramp  acceleration 84 0    Flying restart circuit  P6 8 506 X rw Stop function   Free coasting 84 0  1   Ramp  deceleration  P6 9 500 X rw S ramp 0 00   Linear 84 0 0  0 1 10 0s  S shaped   P6 10 717 X rw REAF  Wait time before 0 10 10 008 85 0 50  an automatic restart  P6 11 718 X rw REAF  Testing period over three 0 00   60 00s 85 30 00  automatic restarts  P6 12 719 X rw REAF  Start function with 0   Ramp  acceleration 85 0  automatic restart 1   Flying restart circuit          2   According to P6 7       168 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Appendix A    Drives Control  continued                                                                                                                   Access  FS User  PNU ID RUN
256. witch on threshold for Upc Vdc          Programmable P12 6 440 440 440 440   the braking resistor   DC braking         100  adjustable  Pulse frequency fPWM kHz   6ladjustable 1 16   Heat dissipation at rated Py W 114 237 283 379 484 638 8               operational current  le   Efficiency h 0 93 0 94 0 95 0 95 0 96 0 96 0 96              Fan  device internal                                  V     V  temperature controlled   Installation size FS1 FS1 FS1 FS2 FS2 FS2 FS3 FS4 FS4 FS5 FS5  Weight m Lbs 12 12 12 15 15 15 22 17 6 17 6 22 1 22 1    kg   0 55   0 55   055   07   0 7   0 7   0 99   80   8 0   10 0   10 0    Notes       Symbols used in technical data and formulas      Contact the Eaton Drives Technical Resource Center for technical data     144 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Appendix                                                                                           Device Series MMX34  MMX34AA   F0 0 Symbols    Unit 103 1D9 204 303 403 506 106  Rated operational current  12  le A 13 1 9 24 33 4 3 5 6 7 6  Overload current for 60s every I A 2 2 9 3 6 5 6 5 84 114  600s at 122  F  50  C   Starting current for 2s I A 2 6 3 8 48 6 6 8 6 11 2 15 2  every 20s at 122  F  50  C   Apparent power in rated 400V 5        0 9 1 32 1 66 2 29 2 98 3 88 5 27  operation 480V S         1 08 1 56 2 2 74 3 57 4 66 6 32  Assigned motor rating 400V P kW 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 2 2 3  460V HP 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 2 2 3 4     Power side  Pr
257. xternal brake actuated  21   Current monitoring  28   Fieldbus  remote output    P5 2 314 V rw       signal Like P5 1 79 3   relay output 2     P5 3 312 V rw DO Signal Like P5 1 79 1    Digital Output    P5 4 315 V rw Frequency monitoring 1 0   Deactivated 79 0   1   0 00 P5 5 Hz   2   P5 5 P6 4 Hz   P5 5 316 V rw Frequency monitoring 1 0 00   P6 4 Hz 80 0 00  reference value   P5 6 346 V rw Frequency monitoring 2 0   Deactivated 80 0   1 0 00   5 7 Hz   2   P5 7   P6 4 Hz    P5 7 347 V rw Frequency monitoring 2 0 00   P6 4 Hz 80 0 00  reference value    P5 8 1457 V rw Current monitoring 0 00   P7 2A 81 0 00                                                          M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 167    Appendix       Digital Output  continued                                                                                                 Access  FS User  PNU ID RUN ro rw Designation Value Range Page  P1 3  Setting  P5 9 458      rw DO logic 0 N 0 81 0   control signal terminal 13  1  N C  P5 10 331 V rw RO1 logic Like P5 9 81 0   control signal terminals 22  23   P5 11 332      rw     2 logic Like P5 9 81 0   control signal terminal 24  25  26   P5 12 459      rw DO  on delay 0 00 320 008 81 0 00  P5 13 460      rw DO  off delay 0 00   320 00s 81 0 00  P5 14 461 V rw R01  on delay 0 00   320 00s 81 0 00  P5 15 424      rw R01  off delay 0 00   320 00s 81 0 00  P5 16 425      rw R02  on delay 0 00   320 00s 81 0 00  P5 17 426 V r
258. y 0 00  0 00 320 00s         P5 17 1426 V        2  off delay 0 00  0 00 320 005         M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com 81    Parameters    Drives Control  P6     In this parameter group  P6   you can define the operating conditions for the M Max  frequency inverter     Drives Control          Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P6 1 125 V     Primary remote control source 1  1 Control signal terminals  1        You can switch directly between 1    and KEYPAD with the  LOC REM button          2 Operating unit  KEYPAD   The LOC REM button has no function here  3 Fieldbus  BUS     You can switch directly between BUS and KEYPAD with the  LOC REM button       Selecting the control sources can be done directly with the Example  Control Level I O Activated  LOC REM button between the control source selected in   P6 1 and the operating unit  READY AUN 8       ALARM            REF   During operation  RUN  the drive is always stopped  STOP  woula h              when changing control sources  LOC REM button            111            The control source selected with parameter P6 1 or with the       EN     v  vw    LOC REM button is shown on the bottom page in the LCD    FWD REV     07 KEYPAD 805   display  see figure on this page              P6 2 117 V     Primary remote speed reference 3    0 Fixed frequency  FFO   The value can be set in parameter P10 1          1 Operating unit  REF     This setting cau
259. y is below reference P5 7  2 P5 7 P6 4 Hz frequency is above reference P5 7   P6 4 2 maximum frequency   P5 7 347 V     Frequency monitoring 2 reference value 0 00  0 00 P6 4 Hz P6 4 2 maximum frequency       Frequency Monitoring  P5 5 P5 7                             80 M Max Series Adjustable Frequency Drive MN04020003E   October 2013 www eaton com    Parameters    Digital Outputs  continued          Access Factory Setting  PNU ID RUN Value Range Description  P1 3   P5 8 1457 V     Current monitoring 0 00  0 00 P7 2 Activate output if current value reaches value selected   16     P7 2   current limit     A monitoring message can be implemented via the digital  outputs  P5 1  P5 2  P5 3   27                                                                                P5 9 1458          DO logic  control signal terminal 13  0  Operation of transistor output DO   0 N O contact  1 N C contact  P5 10 1331          RO1 logic  control signal terminals 22  23  0  Operation of relay contact R13 R14  0 N O contact  1 N C contact  P5 11 1332          RO2 logic  control signal terminal 24  25  26  0  Operation of relay changeover contact  0 N O contact  R21 R24             contact  R21 R22   1 N C contact  R21 R24  or N O contact  R21 R22   P5 12 1459 V     DO  on delay 0 00  0 00 320 00s    P5 13 1460         DO  off delay 0 00  0 00 320 00s      P5 14 1461 V     RO1  on delay 0 00  0 00 320 00s    P5 15 1424 V     RO1  off delay 0 00  0 00 320 00s      P5 16 1425 V     RO2  on dela
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
  FIコントローラー 取扱説明書  Vosstronics TransImp M401ST  Cables Direct CDL-160BG USB cable  User Manual  FINal FaNtasy X-2 - SQUARE ENIX Support Center  EVGA 03G-P4-3668-KR NVIDIA GeForce GTX 660 Ti 3GB graphics card  00ŒÚ - 機器分析施設  VÁLVULA DISTRIBUIDORA NET `N` CLEAN  "取扱説明書"    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file